Fiat - Duceto - Brochure - 2018 - 2018

F I O A W T N E D R U H A C N D A B O T O K O This Owner Handbook is intended to show the vehicle's operating conditions. For the enthusiast user who wants to have insights, curiosities and detailed information about the characteristics and functions of the vehicle, Fiat Professional gives the opportunity to consult a dedicated section which is available in electronic format. ONLINE VEHICLE OWNER HANDBOOK The following symbol is reported within the text of the Owner Handbook, next to the subjects for which details are provided. Go to the www.mopar.eu/owner website and access your personal area. The “Maintenance and care” page includes all the information about your vehicle and the link to access eLUM, where you will find all the details of the Owner Handbook. Alternatively, to access this information, go to the Internet website at http://aftersales.fiat.com/elum/. The eLUM website is free and will allow you, among many other things, to easily consult the on-board documents of all the other vehicles of the Group. Have a nice reading and happy motoring! Dear Customer, We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing a Fiat Ducato. We have written this handbook to help you get to know all the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Here you will find information, advice and important warnings regarding vehicle use and how to achieve the best performance from the technical features of your Fiat Ducato. You are advised to read it right through before taking to the road for the first time, to become familiar with the controls and above all with those concerning brakes, steering and gearbox; at the same time, you can understand the vehicle behaviour on different road surfaces. This document also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care and servicing of your Fiat Ducato over time. After reading it, you are advised to keep the handbook inside the vehicle, for an easy reference and for making sure it remains on board the vehicle should it be sold. In the attached Warranty Booklet you will also find a description of the Services that Fiat offers to its customers, the Warranty Certificate and the detail of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate your new vehicle and the service provided by the people at Fiat. Enjoy reading. Happy motoring! IMPORTANT This Owner Handbook describes all Fiat Ducato versions. As a consequence, you should only consider the information related to the trim level, engine and version that you have purchased. All data contained in this publication are purely indicative. FCA Italy S.p.A. can modify the specifications of the vehicle model described in this publication at any time, for technical or marketing purposes. For further information, contact a Fiat Dealership. READ THIS CAREFULLY REFUELLING Only refuel with automotive diesel conforming to the European specification EN590. The use of other products or mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently invalidate the warranty, due to the damage caused. STARTING THE ENGINE Make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gear lever to neutral; fully depress the clutch pedal without pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to MAR and wait for the warning lights and to switch off; turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine has started. PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material: fire hazard. RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT The vehicle is fitted with a system that allows continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the environment. ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES If, after buying the vehicle, you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), visit a Fiat Dealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the electrical system of the vehicle can support the required load. SCHEDULED SERVICING Correct maintenance enables the vehicle to perfectly maintain performance and safety characteristics, its environmental friendliness and low running costs over time. THE OWNER HANDBOOK CONTAINS... ... important information, advice and warnings for correct use, driving safety and maintenance of your vehicle over time. Particular attention should be paid to information marked with the following symbols: (personal safety), (environmental protection), (vehicle integrity). USE OF THE OWNER HANDBOOK OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Each time direction instructions (left/right or forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are given, these must be intended as regarding an occupant in the driver's seat. Special cases not complying with this rule will be specified as appropriate in the text. The figures in the Owner Handbook are provided by way of example only: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. In addition, the Handbook has been conceived considering vehicles with steering wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible that on vehicles with steering wheel on the right side, the position or construction of some controls is not exactly mirror-like with respect to the figure. To identify the chapter with the information needed you can consult the index at the end of this Owner Handbook. Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd page. A few pages further there is a key for getting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. There is in any case a textual indication of the current chapter at the side of each even page. WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS While reading this Owner Handbook you will find a series of WARNINGS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle. There are also PRECAUTIONS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries. Therefore all WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS must always be carefully followed. WARNINGS and PRECAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols: personal safety; vehicle integrity; environmental protection. NOTE These symbols, when necessary, are indicated besides the title or at the end of the line and are followed by a number. That number recalls the corresponding warning at the end of the relevant section. SYMBOLS Some vehicle components have coloured labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this component. A plate summarising these symbols can also be found under the bonnet. VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modification or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road holding, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could even be fatally injured. KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL SAFETY STARTING AND DRIVING IN AN EMERGENCY MAINTENANCE AND CARE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS MULTIMEDIA CONTENTS KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE In-depth knowledge of your new vehicle starts here. The handbook that you are reading simply and directly explains how it is made and how it works. That’s why we advise you to read it seated comfortably on board, so that you can see what is described here for yourself. THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM ............... 8 THE KEYS..................................... 8 IGNITION DEVICE .......................... 9 ELECTRONIC ALARM................... 10 DOORS ...................................... 11 SEATS........................................ 16 STEERING WHEEL....................... 23 REAR-VIEW MIRRORS ................. 24 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ....................... 25 HEADLIGHTS .............................. 29 CEILING LIGHTS.......................... 29 CONTROLS ................................ 30 WINDOW WASHING .................... 33 HEATING AND VENTILATION ........ 35 HEATING AND VENTILATION CONTROLS ................................ 36 MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ..................................... 36 AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ..................... 37 ADDITIONAL HEATER .................. 38 INDEPENDENT ADDITIONAL HEATER ..................................... 38 ELECTRIC WINDOWS .................. 42 BONNET..................................... 42 HEAD RESTRAINTS ..................... 43 INTERIOR FITTINGS ..................... 44 TACHOGRAPH ............................ 45 SELF-LEVELLING AIR SUSPENSION.............................. 46 ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER ............................... 47 7 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM IN BRIEF This is an electrical engine locking system which increases protection against attempted theft of the vehicle. It is automatically activated when the ignition key is removed. Each key contains an electronic device which modulates the signal emitted during ignition by an aerial built into the ignition device. The signal, which changes each time the engine is started, is the "password", by means of which the control unit recognises the key and enables starting. 1) Operation Each time the vehicle is started turning the ignition key to MAR, the Fiat CODE system control unit sends a recognition code to the engine control module to deactivate the immobiliser. The code is sent only if the Fiat CODE system control unit has recognised the code transmitted from the key. Each time the ignition key is turned to STOP, the Fiat CODE system 8 deactivates the functions of the engine control module. Irregular operation If the code has not been recognised correctly during starting, the symbol or warning light on the instrument panel turns on accompanied by the corresponding message on the display (see the explanations in the “Warning lights and messages" chapter). In this case, turn the key to STOP and then to MAR; if it is still locked, try again with the other keys that come with the car. Contact a Fiat Dealership if you still cannot start the engine. WARNING Each key has its own code which must be stored by the system's control unit. Contact a Fiat Dealership to have new keys (up to 8) stored with a code. symbol Activation of or warning light while driving If the symbol or warning light switches on, this means that the system is running a self-diagnosis (for example due to a voltage drop). If the symbol or warning light stays on, contact a Fiat Dealership. IMPORTANT 1) The electronic components inside the key may be damaged if the key is subjected to strong shocks. In order to ensure complete efficiency of the electronic devices inside the key, it should never be exposed to direct sunlight. THE KEYS MECHANICAL KEY The metal part (A) fig. 1 of the key is fixed. The key operates: the ignition device; the door lock; opening and closing of the fuel tank cap. 1 F1A0008 KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROL The metal insert (A) fig. 2 is retractable and operates: the ignition device; the door lock; opening and closing of the fuel tank cap. To extract/retract the metal insert, press the (B)fig. 2 button. WARNING 1) Button (B) should only be pressed when the key is away from the body, in particular from the eyes and from objects that can be spoilt (e.g. clothes). Do not leave the key unattended to avoid the button being accidentally pressed while it is being handled, e.g. by a child. IMPORTANT 1) Used batteries are harmful to the environment. You can dispose of them either in the correct containers as specified by law or by taking them to a Fiat Dealership, which will deal with their disposal. 2 IGNITION DEVICE The key can be turned to 3 different positions fig. 3: STOP: engine off, key can be extracted, steering locked. Some electrical devices (e.g. sound system, central door locking system, etc.) can operate; MAR: driving position. All electrical devices are enabled; AVV: engine starting (unstable position). F1A0004 Button is used for unlocking the front doors. Button locks all the doors. Button is used for unlocking the load compartment doors. 1) When the doors are locked, if one or more doors are not closed correctly, the LED and direction indicators start flashing quickly. 3 F1A0009 The ignition device is fitted with an electronic safety system that requires the ignition key to be turned back to STOP if the engine does not start, before the starting operation can be repeated. 2) 3) 4) 5) 1) 9 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE STEERING LOCK Activation When the device is at STOP, remove the key and turn the steering wheel until it locks. Deactivation Move the steering wheel slightly as you turn the ignition key to MAR-ON Extracting the ignition key for versions with automatic transmission The ignition key can be removed only if the gear lever is in position P. If the engine is switched off with the gear lever in position P; move the lever to P within 5 seconds. Then it will be possible to remove the ignition key for about 30 seconds. If the described conditions and times are not respected, the ignition key will be automatically locked. To remove the ignition key, turn it to MAR and then to STOP repeating the procedure described above. WARNING 2) If the ignition device has been tampered with (e.g. attempted theft), have it checked over by a Fiat Dealership before driving again. 10 3) Always remove the key when you leave your vehicle to prevent someone from accidentally operating the controls. Remember to engage the handbrake. Engage first gear if the vehicle is parked uphill or reverse gear if the vehicle is parked downhill. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. 4) Never extract the key while the vehicle is moving. The steering wheel will automatically lock as soon as it is turned. This also applies to cases in which the vehicle is towed. 5) It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any aftermarket operation involving steering system or steering column modifications (e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that could adversely affect performance, invalidate the warranty, cause serious safety problems and also result in the vehicle not meeting type-approval requirements. ELECTRONIC ALARM (for versions/markets, where provided) The alarm, in addition to all the remote control functions described previously, is controlled by the receiver located under the dashboard near the fuse box. Activation With the doors and bonnet closed and the ignition key either turned to STOP or removed, point the key with the remote control towards the vehicle and press and release the lock button. Excluding some markets, the system produces an acoustic signal (beep) and enables door locking. The switching on of the alarm is preceded by an self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is detected, the system produces another acoustic signal. In this case, turn the alarm off by pressing the "release doors/release load compartment" button, check that the doors and bonnet are properly closed and turn the alarm back on by pressing the lock button. If a door or the bonnet is not properly shut, it will be excluded from the testing by the alarm system. If the alarm produces an acoustic signal even when the doors and bonnet are correctly closed, a fault has occurred in the operation of the system. Contact a Fiat Dealership. WARNING The alarm does not come on when the central locking is activated using the metal insert in the key. WARNING The alarm is adapted to meet requirements in various countries. Deactivation Press the door release/load compartment release button on the key with remote control. The following operations are performed (excluding some markets): direction indicators flash twice; there are two short acoustic signals (beeps); doors are unlocked. WARNING The alarm does not switch off when the central opening is activated using the metal insert in the key. Disabling To permanently disable the alarm (e.g. during a long period of inactivity), simply lock the vehicle by turning the metal insert of the key with remote control in the lock. WARNING If the batteries of the key with the remote control run out or the system fails, the alarm can be switched off by placing the key in the ignition switch and turning it to MAR. DOORS DOOR CENTRAL LOCKING/UNLOCKING Locking from the outside With the doors shut, press button on the remote control fig. 4 - fig. 5 or insert the metal insert (A) in the lock of the door on the driver's side and turn it clockwise. The doors will only be locked if all doors are shut. To extract the metal insert, press the button (B). If one or more of the doors is open after the button on the remote control is pressed, the direction indicators and the LED in the button (A) fig. 7 will flash quickly for about 3 seconds. With the function on, the button (A) fig. 7 is disabled. on the remote Pressing button control twice in quick succession to activate the dead lock device (see the "Dead lock device" paragraph). 4 F1A0112 5 F1A0113 Door unlocking from the outside Briefly press button fig. 4 or fig. 5, according to the version, to remotely unlock the front doors, switch on the roof lights in a timed manner and flash the direction indicators. 11 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE will be locked only if all the doors are properly shut. 6 F1A0114 Turn the metal insert anticlockwise fig. 6 in the driver's side door lock to unlock all the doors. With the battery disconnected, access to the vehicle will only be possible by unlocking the driver's door using the mechanical lock. Locking/unlocking doors from the inside Press the button (A) fig. 7 to lock the doors and press it again to unlock them. Locking / unlocking is centralised (front and rear). When the doors are locked, the LED in button (A) is on and, when the button is pressed again, all the doors are centrally unlocked and the warning light is switched off. When the doors are unlocked, the LED is off and pressing the button again centrally locks all the doors. The doors 12 7 F1A0303 Following the locking of the doors using: remote control door pawl it will not be possible to unlock using the button (A) fig. 7 on the dashboard. WARNING With the central locking on, pulling the opening lever for one of the front doors causes the central locking to be switched off. Individual doors can be unlocked by pulling the opening handle of one of the rear doors. If a power supply is not present (blown fuse, battery disconnected, etc.) it is, however, possible to lock the doors manually. After exceeding 20 km/h, all the doors will be locked automatically if the Setup menu function has been selected (see explanations in "Knowing the instrument panel" sector of the “Multifunction display" paragraph). MECHANICAL LOCK OF PASSENGER SIDE CAB DOOR This is a device which allows the passenger side cab door to be locked mechanically, to prevent it from being opened from the outside, if no power supply is available (battery disconnected). The device in fig. 8 can be engaged only with the passenger side cab door open. Proceed as follows: Insert the key in device (A) and move it upward as shown to lock the door fig. 8. Close the door. Check that the door has locked by trying the outside handle. To unlock the device, operate the inside handle of the passenger side cab door or, if battery power has been restored, press button or (per versions/markets where it is provided) on the key with remote control. A 8 F1A0494 LOCKING/UNLOCKING THE LOAD COMPARTMENT The activation of the locking is signalled by the LED in the button. The LED comes on in the following cases: after each door lock command generated by the button (D) fig. 9 or by in the dashboard; button when the instrument panel is activated; upon opening of one of the front doors; when the door is locked at 20 km/h (if activated from the menu). The lock is turned off when one of the load compartment doors is opened or on a door release request (load compartment or centralised) or an unlocking request from the remote control/door catch. 9 F1A0116 DEAD LOCK DEVICE (for versions/markets, where provided) It is a safety device that disables operation of the interior handles. Press the lock/unlock button (A) fig. 7 to prevent opening the doors from inside the passenger compartment in the event of an attempted break-in (e.g. when a window is broken). The dead lock device therefore offers the best possible protection against break in attempts. We recommend engaging it whenever the vehicle is parked and left unattended. among the dashboard controls flashes to indicate that the device has been turned on. If one or more of the doors is not perfectly shut, the dead lock device will not be activated, thus preventing a person getting into the vehicle through the open door and, on shutting, it, remaining stuck inside the passenger compartment. Device deactivation The system is disabled automatically on every door in the following cases: if the mechanical key is turned to the opening position in the driver's door; by unlocking the doors using the remote control; by turning the ignition key to the MAR position. SLIDING SIDE DOOR 7) 8) To open the sliding side door, lift the handle (A) fig. 10 and accompany the door in the opening direction. 6) Device activation The dead lock device is automatically activated on every door with two short presses on the button on the key with remote control fig. 4. The direction indicators flash 3 times and the LED on the button (A) fig. 7 13 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE 10 F1A0117 The sliding side door is equipped with a stop that prevents it sliding beyond the end of its travel when opening. To close, operate the exterior handle (A) (or the corresponding interior handle) and push to closed. In any case, make sure that the door is correctly attached to the device that holds it fully open. To ensure that the sliding side door always operates correctly during the winter (at low temperatures), lubricate the gasket thoroughly: contact the Fiat Service Network. CHILD SAFETY DEVICE (for versions/markets, where provided) This system prevents the sliding side doors being opened from the inside. The device fig. 11 can be engaged only with the sliding side door open: (1) position - Device not engaged (door may be opened from the inside). (2) position - Device engaged (door locked) 12 F1A0120 Manual opening of the first swing door from the inside (for versions/markets, where provided) Pull the lever (B) fig. 13 in the direction indicated by the arrow. 11 F1A0143 The device stays on even if the doors are electrically unlocked. Manual closure of the first swing door from the outside Turn the key clockwise or press the button on the key with remote control. Close the left door first, followed by the right door. 9) DOUBLE REAR SWING DOOR 10) 11) Manual opening of the first swing door from the outside Turn the key anticlockwise fig. 6 or press the button on the remote control and turn handle (A) fig. 12 in the direction of the arrow. 14 13 F1A0121 Manual opening of the second swing door Pull the lever (C) fig. 14 in the direction indicated by the arrow. The double rear swing doors have two opening positions: the first to an angle of approximately 90° and the second is approximately 180°; on some trim versions/markets 270° opening is also available. To open the swing doors to 180°, or 270° (for versions/markets where provided), proceed as follows: reach the 90° door opening position; keep pulling the door to press a force to allow them to open to 180° or to 270° (for versions/markets where provided). fig. 15 on the electric window control panel. REAR FOOTBOARD (for goods carrier van versions) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 2) 15 F1A0123 MOVING FOOTBOARD (for versions/markets, where provided) When the side door of the passenger compartment or luggage compartment is opened, a footboard emerges from the lower part of the floorpan fig. 16 to make it easier to board the vehicle. The vehicle can be equipped with a rear retractable footboard (A) fig. 17, which aids climbing into and out of the rear load compartment. The footboard can slide under the vehicle when not used so as not to increase the vehicle external dimensions. The footboard slides manually both when opening and closing. 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 2) 17 F1A0410 WARNING 14 F1A0122 Electric locking from inside Close the two rear swing doors (first left, then right) and press the button (D) 16 F1A0119 6) Once the dead lock device is engaged it is impossible to open the doors from inside the vehicle. Before engaging the system please therefore check that there is no-one left on board. If the remote control battery is flat, the system can be 15 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE 16 disengaged only by inserting the key metal insert in either of the door locks as described previously: in this case the device remains active only for the rear doors. 7) Before leaving the vehicle parked with sliding doors open, always check that the latch is engaged. 8) Do not move the vehicle with side doors open. 9) Always use this device when carrying children. 10) This spring loaded system has activation forces that were designed for optimum comfort. Accidental knocks or a strong gust of wind may release the springs and let the doors close spontaneously. 11) With the doors opened to 180 degrees and 270 degrees, no locking system is effective. Do not use this opening with the vehicle parked on a gradient or when it is windy. 12) It is forbidden to drive the vehicle with the footboard open. 13) Do not use the retracted footboard for getting up or down the load compartment. 14) Make sure that the footboard is suitably locked by the provided retaining systems before, after and during its use. An incomplete opening or closing might cause an improper movement of the footboard with risks arising for the operator and external users. 15) Before setting off after parking or before moving the vehicle in any way, ensure the footboard is fully stowed away. Because the movement of the footboard is controlled by that of the sliding side door, incomplete stowing of the footboard or non-closure of the rear doors is indicated on the by the lighting of a warning light instrument panel. 16) The footboard lightly projects from the vehicle even if retracted; therefore, when rear parking sensors are provided, their operating range is lightly reduced. IMPORTANT 2) The footboard presence may reduce the ramp approach angles; it is therefore recommended, in case of a very steep ramp, to be very careful in order not to damage the footboard. SEATS 17) 3) Longitudinal adjustment Lift lever (A) fig. 18 and push the seat forwards or backwards: in the driving position, you should be able to rest your arms on the rim of the steering wheel. 18) 18 F1A0021 Height adjustment To raise the seat: while seated, move the lever (B) fig. 18 (front part of the seat) or the lever (C) fig. 18 (rear part of the seat) upwards and lift your body weight off the part of the seat that must be raised. To lower the seat: while seated, move the lever (B) (front part of the seat) or the lever (C) (rear part of the seat) upwards and press your body weight off the part of the seat that must be lowered. Backrest angle adjustment Turn knob (D) fig. 18. 19) Lumbar adjustment Operate the knob (E) fig. 19 to adjust. SEAT WITH REVOLVING BASE (for versions/markets, where provided) It may be turned through 180° toward the seat on the opposite side. Operate the control (A) fig. 22 to turn the seat. Before turning the seat, it must be moved forward and only then adjusted longitudinally fig. 23. 19 F1A0022 SPRUNG SEAT The seat is equipped with a mechanical spring system and hydraulic shock absorber to ensure maximum comfort and safety. The system of springs also effectively absorbs impact from uneven road surfaces. See the description in the "Seats" paragraph for forwards/backwards adjustments, height adjustments, backrest adjustment, lumbar adjustment and armrest adjustment. Ballast weight adjustment Use the knob (A) fig. 20 to set the desired adjustment according to your body weight, in the range 40 kg to 130 kg. 20 F1A0023 SEATS WITH ADJUSTABLE ARMRESTS The driver's seat may be equipped with an armrest that can be raised and adjusted for height. Operate the wheel (A) fig. 21 to adjust. 20) 21) 22 21 F1A0025 F1A0024 1 23 2 F1A0026 17 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE REVOLVING SEAT WITH SEAT BELT (for versions/markets, where provided) It is equipped with a three-point seat belt fig. 24, two adjustable armrests (for their adjustment, see the "Seats with adjustable armrests" paragraph) and a head restraint with adjustable height (adjusting it, see the "head restraints" paragraph). 22) Height adjustment Operate the controls (B) fig. 25 or (C) fig. 25 to raise or lower the front/rear part of the seat, respectively. Seat rotation It may be turned through 180° toward the seat on the opposite side and approximately 35° toward the door. It may be locked in driving position or at 180°. Operate the lever (D) fig. 26 (located on the right side of the seat) to turn the seat. Before turning the seat, it must be moved forward and only then adjusted longitudinally fig. 23. 23) 24 F1A0027 Backrest angle adjustment Operate the lever (A) fig. 25. 26 25 18 F1A0028 F1A0029 Heated seats (for versions/markets, where provided) With the key turned to MAR, press button (E) fig. 27 to switch the function on/off. 27 F1A0030 CAPTAIN CHAIR (for versions/markets, where provided) The vehicle may be equipped with the Captain Chair fig. 28, which, depending on the version, may have various adjustments (revolving or fixed, with seat belt, etc.). For the various adjustments refer to the explanations in the "Revolving seat with seat belt" paragraph above. FLAP ON BENCH (for versions/markets, where provided) The seat is equipped with a fold-down flap that can be used as a document support surface. To use, pull the tab (A) fig. 29 and lower the flap. The flap is equipped with two cup holder indents and a support surface with a paper holder clip. CARGO SPACE (For versions/markets, where provided) Depending on the version, you can request an additional load compartment fig. 30 located behind the cab. 31 28 F1A0345 30 29 F1A0031 F1A0041 TRAY UNDER THE SEAT (for versions/markets, where provided) Under the driver's seat, there is a tray (A) fig. 31, which can be easily removed by sliding it out of the clips on the support base. F1A0032 SEAT BASE PLASTIC COVERS (for versions/markets, where provided) The front trim (A) fig. 32 can be opened by using the release handle (B) fig. 32 at the top. This gives access to the tray under the seat (see "Tray under the seat" paragraph). To make it easier to open the front cover and gain access to the compartment, the seat must be as far back as possible. To allow removal of the front cover, it must be turned as far forward as possible and withdrawn from the hooks on the lower side by pulling toward the front of the vehicle. 24) 19 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE When the seat is restored to its normal position, it engages with the retaining device without the need to operate the lever again. On the one-piece Panorama seat in the second row both side seats are fixed. 32 F1A0033 PANORAMA VERSIONS Adjustment of passenger seat reclining backrest Turn knob (A) fig. 33. Folding middle seat backrest (2nd 3rd row) Lift the lever (C) fig. 33 and tilt the backrest forward. A hard surface on the back of the middle seat is for use as an armrest and table with cup holders. Operate the lever to reposition the backrest. To lower the backrest of the middle seat in the second row, remove the head restraint to make it easier to adjust the backrest of the middle seat in the first row. COMBI VERSIONS Easy Entry position Lift the lever (A) fig. 34 and tilt the backrest forward. 33 34 F1A0035 Stacked position Proceed as follows: remove the head restraints from the easy entry position; lift the lever (B) fig. 35 (located under the lever (A) fig. 34) with your right hand; turn the backrest by 5° towards the rear area; fold forward the backrest with your left hand. 25) F1A0034 Access to second row seats To access the second row of seats, operate the lever (B) fig. 33 on the right outside seat in the first row and tilt the backrest forward, accompanying it with your left hand. 35 20 F1A0036 Removing the bench WARNING At least two people are needed to remove the bench. Proceed as follows to remove the bench: from the stacked position, operate the levers (C) and (D) fig. 36, rotating them forward (as specified on the adhesive label on the lower crossmember); lift seat base forward; bring the seat to an upright position; from the upright position, operate the levers (E) and (F) fig. 37 turning them upwards; raise the bench from the floor and remove it. 26) 36 37 F1A0038 FLEX FLOOR REAR SEAT To release the seat, proceed as follows: operate the rear release lever (A) fig. 38 to aid releasing the safety catch underneath it (movement (1)); pull the black knob (B) fig. 38 (movement (2)); lift the lever (A) (movement (3)), over the retaining slider (C) fig. 39 (on the side) which holds the system in raised position during the operations. 39 F1A0389 When the base has been locked, it will be possible to move the seat by accompanying it with both hands to move it forwards or backwards fig. 40. It will also be possible to disassemble it by pulling it at the points in which its catches are free with respect to the holes in the tracks; in that position (easily found by sliding the base a little and simultaneously pulling it out) the seat can easily be removed fig. 41. F1A0037 40 38 F1A0390 F1A0388 21 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE not happen, check that the seat is in the exact locking position in relation to the rail (moving the seat backwards or forwards a few millimetres until it is properly attached). 41 F1A0391 After the sliding and removal operations, the seat should be refitted and secured to the rails on the floor before driving, as follows: fit the base on the rails; push the latch lever downwards fig. 42 with sufficient force, until the system locks. 42 F1A0392 WARNING The locking system is only secured when the safety clip under the lever locks it horizontally. If this does 22 Once the quick-release base is locked in position, it will be as in the first stage, in other words with the retaining lever perfectly parallel to the floor guaranteeing that the seat is securely fastened in the selected position. The seat can be turned 180º toward the seat on the opposite side. To turn it, see the "Seat with revolving base" paragraph. 4-SEATER BENCH SEAT (Crew Cab Van versions) (for versions/markets, where provided) For specific versions, the vehicle features a 4-seater rear bench seat. The bench has a bottle holder cavity at the side (A) fig. 43. The seat can be tilted manually to allow access to the load compartment fig. 44. 43 F1A0393 44 F1A0394 WARNING 17) All adjustments must be made with the vehicle stationary. 18) After releasing the adjustment lever, always check that the seat is locked on the guides by trying to move it back and forth. If it is not locked, the seat may move unexpectedly and make you lose control of the vehicle. 19) For maximum safety, keep the backrest upright, lean back into it and make sure the seat belt fits closely across your chest and pelvis. 20) Before putting on the seat belt, ensure that the armrests are vertical (see "Seat belts" paragraph). 21) Before unfastening the belts and getting out of the vehicle, ensure that the outer armrest (door side) is fully raised. 22) All adjustments must be made with the vehicle stationary. In particular, while turning the seat, take care that it does not interfere with the handbrake lever. 23) Ensure the seat is locked in driving position before starting up the vehicle. 24) Do not place heavy loads on the flap with the vehicle in motion because they could be thrown against the vehicle occupants in the event of sudden braking or impacts, causing severe injury. 25) Do not travel with passengers seated in the 3rd row with the 2nd row bench folded over. Do not place objects of any type on the backrest of the 2nd row bench folded over: in the event of impact or sharp braking they could be thrown against the occupants of the vehicle casing serious injury. For more information, see the contents of the adhesive plate located under the bench. 26) When refitting the bench, ensure that it is correctly locked to the floor guides. IMPORTANT 3) The fabric upholstery of your vehicle is designed to withstand the normal wear and tear of your vehicle for a long time. You are however recommended to avoid strong and/or continuous scratching with clothing accessories such as metal buckles, studs, Velcro fastenings and the like, as these items cause stress of the cover fabric that could lead to yarn breaking and damage the upholstery. STEERING WHEEL The steering wheel position can be adjusted axially. To adjust, proceed as follows: release the lever fig. 45 by pulling it towards the steering wheel (position (2)); adjust the steering wheel; release lever by pushing it forwards (position (1)). 27) 28) 45 F1A0040 WARNING 27) All adjustments must be carried out only with the vehicle stationary and the engine off. 28) It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any aftermarket operation involving steering system or steering column modifications (e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that could adversely affect performance, invalidate the warranty, cause serious safety problems and also result in the vehicle not meeting type-approval requirements. 23 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE REAR-VIEW MIRRORS INTERIOR MIRROR Lever (A) fig. 46 can be used to move the mirror to two different positions: normal or anti-glare. 48 46 F1A0353 DOOR MIRRORS Mirrors with manual adjustment To adjust the mirrors, manually operate on each of the two glasses of each mirror. 29) Power Mirrors The electrical adjustment can only be carried out with the ignition key in the MAR position. To adjust the mirrors, turn knob (B) fig. 47 to one of the four positions: (1) left mirror, (2) right mirror, (3) left wide angle and (4) right wide angle (positions (3) and (4) available on short 24 arm external rear-view mirrors, Tempo Libero versions and on all medium and long arm rear-view mirrors). After rotating the knob (B) on the mirror to be adjusted, move it in the direction shown by the arrows to adjust the selected glass. 47 F1A0042 Mirror folding with manual adjustment When required (for example when the mirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces or during an automatic vehicle wash) it is possible to fold the mirrors manually moving them from position (1) to position (2) fig. 48. If the mirror has been accidentally rotated forwards (position (3)), for example due to an impact, it must be manually returned to position (1). 30) F1A0043 Mirror folding with electrical adjustment (for versions/markets, where provided) When required (for example when the mirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces or during an automatic vehicle wash) it is possible to fold the mirrors either electrically or manually moving them from position (1) to position (2) fig. 48. 49 F1A0044 Electric folding To fold the mirrors electrically, press rocker button (A) fig. 49 in point (2) . To bring the mirrors back to open position, press point (1) of the button. WARNING If the mirrors are folded electrically, they should be returned to the open position electrically: do not try to return the mirrors manually to driving position. Manual folding To fold the mirrors manually, move them from position (1) fig. 48 to position (2). If the mirrors have been folded manually, they can be returned to the opening position both manually and electrically. WARNING To take the mirrors electrically to the opening position, press point (2) of the rocker button (A) fig. 49 until you hear an engagement "click", then press again point (1) of the button. Folding forwards The mirrors can be manually folded forwards (position (3) fig. 48) or brought to the opening position (2) again manually if they have been accidentally rotated forwards (for example due to an impact). If the mirrors have been rotated forwards manually or due to an impact, they can be returned to the opening position both manually and electrically. To take the mirrors electrically to the opening position, press point (2) of the rocker button (A) fig. 49 until you hear an engagement "click", then press again point (1) of the button. WARNING If the mirrors have been manually folded by mistake to position (3) fig. 48, the mirror moves to an intermediate position.In this case, manually rotate the mirror to position (1), then press point (2) of the rocker button (A) fig. 49 to return the mirror to position (2) until a "click" is heard, then press point (1) of the button to bring it back to position (1). Defrosting/demisting (for versions/markets where provided) (for versions/markets, where provided) Mirrors are fitted with resistors that will activate when turning the heated rear window on (by pressing button ). WARNING 29) As the driver's exterior mirror is curved, it may slightly alter the perception of distance of the reflected image. Further, the reflective surface of the lower part of the exterior mirrors is parabolic to increase the field of view. The size of the reflected image is reduced and gives the impression that the reflected object is further away than it is. 30) While driving the mirrors must remain in position (1). EXTERIOR LIGHTS IN BRIEF The left stalk includes the controls for the exterior lights. The exterior lights can only be switched on when the ignition key is in the ON position. LIGHTS OFF Knurled ring turned to symbol fig. 50. WARNING This function is timed and will turn off automatically after several minutes. 25 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE 50 F1A0064 DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) (for versions/markets, where provided) With the ignition key turned to MAR and the selector wheel turned to position fig. 50 the day lights are automatically activated; the other lights and interior lighting remain off. The automatic operation of the daytime running lights can be activated/deactivated, for versions/markets where provided, via the display menu (refer to the explanations in the "Display" section of the "Knowing the instrument panel" chapter). If the daytime running lights are deactivated, no light comes on when the ring is turned to . 31) 26 DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS/SIDE LIGHTS With the ignition key turned to MAR, turn the twist switch to fig. 51. If dipped headlights are activated, the daytime running lights switch off and the side lights and dipped headlights switch on. warning light switches on in the The instrument panel. When the ignition key is turned to STOP or removed and the ring from , all the side position to position lights and the number plate lights come on. The warning light switches on in the instrument panel. 51 The warning light switches on in the instrument panel. To turn the main beams off, pull the stalk towards the steering wheel again (dipped beams will come back on). 52 F1A0066 FLASHING THE HEADLIGHTS Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel (1st unstable position) regardless of the position of the ring.fig. 53 The warning light switches on in the instrument panel. F1A0065 MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS When the ring nut is at , pull the stalk towards the steering wheel (2nd unstable position)fig. 52. 53 F1A0067 AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM (High Beam Control) headlights In order not to dazzle other road users, the main beam headlights are automatically turned off when approaching oncoming vehicles or when following a vehicle travelling in the same direction. The system is activated with the menu item and by rotating the light selector to the position. When the main beam headlights are activated for the first time, pulling the stalk to turn them on activates the is function and the warning light displayed; if the main beam headlights are actually on, the relevant blue warning light is displayed as well. If the driving speed is over 40 km/h and the function is activated, pulling the stalk again to the main beam headlight position deactivates the function. If the driving speed is below 15 km/h and the function is activated, the function switches the main beam headlights off. Pulling the stalk again to the main beam headlight position is interpreted as a request for the main beam headlights to stay on, therefore the blue warning light on the instrument panel turns on and the main beam headlights stay on until the speed exceeds 40 km/h again. The function is enabled again automatically when 40 km/h is exceeded . If the stalk is pulled again in this condition, to request main beam headlight deactivation, the function remains off and the main beam headlights switch off. Rotate the ring to the position fig. 51 to deactivate the automatic function. turn off the corresponding headlight daytime running light (DRL). Lane change function If you wish to signal a lane change, place the left stalk in the unstable position for less than half a second. The direction indicator on the side selected will be activated for 5 flashes and then go out automatically. 32) 33) PARKING LIGHTS These lights can be turned on only with the ignition key at STOP or extracted by turning the ring on the left stalk first to position and then to positions or . The warning light switches on in the instrument panel. DIRECTION INDICATORS Take the stalk to the (stable) position fig. 54: up (position (1)): to activate the right direction indicator; down (position (2)): activates the left direction indicator. Warning light or will blink on the instrument panel. When the daytime running lights are on (in the versions without LEDs and for versions/markets, where provided), activating the direction indicators will 54 F1A0068 "FOLLOW ME HOME" DEVICE This device allows the illumination of the space in front of the vehicle for a preset time. Activation With the ignition key in the STOP position or extracted, pull the stalk towards the steering wheel fig. 55 and move it within 2 minutes of the engine switching off. 27 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE Each time the stalk is moved, the lights stay on for an extra 30 seconds up to a maximum of 210 seconds; then the lights are switched off automatically. The warning light on the instrument panel will light up and the corresponding message will appear in the display (see “Warning lights and messages" paragraph) for as long as the function is activated. Activation Turn the ring to position fig. 56: this turns the side lights and the dipped beam headlights on simultaneously and automatically depending on the exterior brightness conditions. 55 F1A0069 The warning light comes on when the stalk is operated and stays on until the function is automatically deactivated. Each movement of the stalk only increases the amount of time the lights stay on. Deactivation Keep the stalk pulled towards the steering wheel fig. 55 for more than 2 seconds. 28 AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT SENSOR (dusk sensor) (for versions/markets, where provided) It detects variations in brightness outside the vehicle depending on the light sensitivity setting: the greater the sensitivity, the less outside light needed to activate the exterior lights. The sensitivity of the dusk sensor may be adjusted, using the "Setup menu" on the display. 56 F1A0070 Deactivation The main beam headlights will go out followed by the side lights after approximately 10 seconds, when the sensor is deactivated. The sensor is not capable of detecting the presence of fog. Therefore, in these circumstances, the lights have to be turned on manually. WARNING 31) The daytime running lights are an alternative to the dipped beam headlights for driving during the daytime in countries where it is compulsory to have lights on during the day while driving, and they are also permitted in those countries where this is not obligatory. Daytime running lights cannot replace dipped beam headlights when driving at night or through tunnels. The use of daytime running lights is governed by the highway code of the country in which you are driving. Comply with legal requirements. 32) The system is based on recognition via a camera. Particular environmental conditions may affect the correct recognition of traffic conditions. Therefore, the driver is always responsible for the correct use of the main beam headlight function in compliance with the laws in force. Rotate the ring to position to deactivate the automatic function. 33) If the camera loses its position due to a load variation, the system may not work temporarily to allow the camera to perform an auto-calibration. HEADLIGHTS LIGHT BEAM DIRECTION The correct alignment of the headlights is essential for the comfort and safety of the driver and other road users. To ensure the best visibility when travelling with the headlights on, the headlight alignment must be correct. Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the headlights checked and adjusted. HEADLIGHT ALIGNMENT CORRECTOR This device works with the ignition key in the MAR position and the dipped headlights on. Headlight alignment adjustment Press or on the control panel fig. 57. The instrument panel display shows the position in relation to the adjustment set. WARNING Check the alignment of the light beams each time the weight of the load transported changes. CEILING LIGHTS MODE 57 F1A0326 FOG LIGHTS ALIGNMENT (for versions/markets, where provided) Contact a Fiat Dealership to have the headlights checked and adjusted. ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHTS WHEN ABROAD The dipped beam headlights are aligned for operation in the country where the vehicle was originally purchased. When in countries where you drive on the other side of the road, you need to alter the light beam direction by affixing a specially designed self-adhesive film in order not to dazzle the vehicles travelling in the opposite direction. This film is provided by Lineaccessori MOPAR and is available at Fiat Dealerships. FRONT ceiling LIGHT WITH SPOT LIGHTS Switch (A) fig. 58 is used to switch on/off the ceiling light bulbs. With switch (A) in central position: lights (C) and (D) switch on/off when the front doors are opened/closed. With switch (A) pressed to the left, lights (C) e (D) stay off. With switch (A) pressed to the right, lights (C) e (D) stay on. 58 F1A0074 Lights switch on/off progressively. Switch (B) is a spot light; when the roof light is off, it switches the following on individually: light (C) if pressed on the left side; light (D) if pressed on the right side. The timed period ends automatically when the doors are locked. 29 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE Ceiling light timing On some versions, to facilitate getting in/out of the vehicle at night or with poor lighting, two different timed modes are available: for entering the vehicle; for leaving the vehicle. LED COURTESY LIGHT IN LOAD COMPARTMENT It is located on the inside the load compartment fig. 59. 59 F1A0489 The switch (A) can be used to turn it on and off: position : the courtesy light is always on; position : the courtesy light switches on when the front door, side door and rear swing door is opened. It switches off automatically after 10 seconds from when all the doors are closed. It also switches on when the movement of a person is detected 30 in the load compartment, and then switches off automatically after a few seconds from the end of the movement; OFF position: the courtesy light is always off. In any case, if the switch is left in on position, the ceiling light switches off automatically 15 minutes after the engine switching off. REMOVABLE COURTESY LIGHT (for versions/markets, where provided) It is used as both a fixed light and a portable electric torch. When the removable light is connected to its fixed mount fig. 60, the electric torch battery is automatically recharged. With the vehicle stationary and the ignition key either turned to STOP or removed, the ceiling light is recharged for a maximum of 15 minutes. 60 F1A0077 CONTROLS HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS They are turned on by pressing switch (A) fig. 61, regardless of the position of the ignition key. 61 F1A0306 Warning lights and are lit up in the instrument panel when this device is activated. Press the switch (A) again to turn the lights off. Emergency braking (for versions/markets, where provided) In the event of emergency braking the hazard warning lights come on automatically, as do the and warning lights in the panel. The function switches off automatically when the nature of the braking changes. FOG LIGHTS (for versions/markets, where provided) fig. 62 with the Press button side/tail lights on to turn the fog lights on. Instrument panel warning light comes on. Press the button again to switch the lights off. MODE 63 MODE 62 F1A0331 REAR FOG LIGHT These lights come on, with the dipped headlights on or with the side lights and fog lights on (for versions/markets where provided) by pressing the button fig. 63. Instrument panel warning light comes on. Press the button again to turn the lights off, or turn off the dipped beams and/or the front fog lights (where provided). MODE F1A0323 FOG LIGHTS / REAR FOG LIGHTS (for versions/markets, where provided) With the dipped beam headlights on, use the button (A) fig. 64 to turn on the front/rear fog lights, as follows: first press: turns on the fog lights, the warning light on the instrument panel will turn on; second press: turns on the rear fog lights, the warning light on the instrument panel will turn on; third press: front/rear fog lights off. 64 F1A0438 PARKING LIGHTS These lights can be turned on only with the ignition key at STOP or extracted by turning the ring on the left stalk first to position and then to positions or . The warning light switches on in the instrument panel. ECO FUNCTION (For versions/markets, where provided) To activate the function press the ECO fig. 64 button. When the function is enabled, the corresponding LED on the button turns on together with an icon and a message on the display. This function is memorised, so when the vehicle is started again, the system keeps the setting it had before the engine was stopped. Press the ECO button again to disable the function and restore the normal driving setting. In the event of a malfunction with the function on, the system automatically 31 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE disables the ECO function and restores the normal driving setting. HEATED REAR WINDOW (for versions/markets, where provided) Press button (A) fig. 65 to switch the device on. The device will be switched off automatically after approximately 20 minutes. 66 65 F1A0330 BATTERY DISCONNECTION FUNCTION (DISCONNECTOR) (for versions/markets, where provided) The battery disconnection function is enabled with the ignition key in the BATT position, as illustrated on the dedicated plate located in the area shown in fig. 66. To turn the ignition key to BATT position, press the button (A) (red) fig. 67. The battery will be disconnected, by interrupting the earth lead, about 7 minutes after the key is turned to the BATT position. This 7 minute period is necessary to: allow the driver to get out of the vehicle and lock the doors using the remote control; DOOR LOCKING To lock all doors at the same time, press the button (A) fig. 68, located on the centre console, regardless of the ignition key's position. 68 67 32 F1A0082 guarantee that all the vehicle electrical systems have been deactivated. With the battery disconnected, access to the vehicle will only be possible by unlocking the driver's door using the mechanical lock. To restore the battery connection, insert the ignition key and turn it to the MAR position, the vehicle can be started normally at this point. If the battery is disconnected, it may be necessary to set certain electrical devices again (e.g. clock, date, etc.). F1A0083 F1A0303 The LED on the button switches on when the doors are locked. 69 F1A0085 The electric window panel there is a button (D) fig. 69, which independently unlocks/locks the load compartment. WINDOW WASHING IN BRIEF With the stalk in position (B), turn ring (F) to select one of four different speeds for the flick operation mode: very slow flick - - slow flick - - - medium flick - - - - fast flick (C) continuous slow operation. (D) continuous fast operation (E) temporary fast operation (unstable position). Temporary fast operation in position (E) is limited to the time that the lever is manually held in this position. The lever returns to position (A) when it is released, automatically stopping the windscreen wipers. 4) The right-hand lever fig. 70 turns on the windscreen wiper/washer and, where provided, the headlight washers and the rain sensor. This operates only with the ignition key turned to MAR. WINDSCREEN WIPER / WASHER The right hand stalk fig. 70 can take up five different positions: (A) windscreen wiper off. (B) flick operation. 70 F1A0071 WARNING We recommend replacing the blades once a year. “Smart washing” function Pulling the stalk towards the steering wheel (unstable position) operates the windscreen washer fig. 71. Keeping the stalk pulled for more than half a second, with just one movement it is possible to operate the washer jet and the wiper at the same time. 33 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE The windscreen wiper stops working three strokes after the stalk is released. A further stroke after approx. 6 seconds completes the wiping cycle. 71 F1A0072 RAIN SENSOR (for versions/markets, where provided) The rain sensor is located behind the driving mirror in contact with the windscreen and has the purpose of automatically adjust, during the intermittent operation, the frequency of the windscreen wiper strokes as to the rain intensity. WARNING Keep the glass in the sensor area clean. Activation fig. 70 Move the right lever down by one click (position (B)). 34 The activation of the sensor is signalled by a "stroke" to show that the command has been acquired. Turn the control (F) to increase the rain sensor sensitivity. The increasing of the rain sensor sensitivity is signalled by a "stroke" to show that the command has been acquired. If the windscreen washer is used with the rain sensor activated, the normal washing cycle is performed, after which the rain sensor resumes its normal automatic operation. Deactivation fig. 70 Move the lever from position (B) or turn the ignition key to OFF. At the next start-up (key at ON), the sensor will not be reactivated even if the stalk is at (B). To activate the sensor, move the stalk to position (A) or (C) and then to position (B) or turn the sensitivity adjustment knurled ring. Rain sensor activation will be indicated by at least one wiper "stroke" even if the windscreen is dry. The rain sensor is capable of recognising the difference between day and night and making the necessary adjustments automatically. 34) HEADLIGHT WASHERS (for versions/markets, where provided) The headlight washers are “retractable", i.e.: they are located inside the front bumper and they are activated when (with dipped beams on) the windscreen washer is operated. WARNING Check the correct condition and cleanliness of nozzles at regular intervals. WARNING 34) Streaks of water may cause unnecessary blade movements. IMPORTANT 4) Never use the screen wiper to remove layers of snow or ice from the windscreen glass. In such conditions, the wiper may be subjected to excessive stress and the motor cut-out switch, which prevents operation for a few seconds, may intervene. If operation is not restored, contact a Fiat Dealership. HEATING AND VENTILATION MODE 72 F1A0302 1. Upper fixed vent 2. Adjustable central vents 3. Fixed side vents 4. Adjustable side vents 5. Lower vents for front seats 35 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE HEATING AND VENTILATION CONTROLS for heating when the outside temperature is very low: to direct as much air as possible to the feet; to warm the feet and demist the windscreen at the same time; for quick windscreen demisting. Air recirculation on/off knob D Turn the knob (D) to to activate internal air recirculation. to deactivate Turn the knob (D) to internal air recirculation. MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM 73 F1A0048 CONTROLS Air temperature adjustment ring A (mixing hot and cold air) Red section = hot air Blue section = cold air (for versions/markets, where provided) 2) CONTROLS 36 Knob B activates/adjusts the fan 0 = fan off 1-2-3 = fan speed 4 = maximum fan speed Air distribution ring C to convey air to the central and side vents; to warm the feet and convey slightly cooler air to the dashboard vents, in intermediate temperature conditions; for heating when the outside temperature is very low: to direct as much air as possible to the feet; to warm the feet and demist the windscreen at the same time; for quick windscreen demisting. Air recirculation on/off knob D Press the button (button LED on) to turn the internal air recirculation on. Press the button again (button LED off) to turn the internal air recirculation off. Knob B activates/adjusts the fan 0 = fan off 1-2-3 = fan speed = maximum fan speed 4 Air distribution ring C to convey air to the central and side vents; to warm the feet and convey slightly cooler air to the dashboard vents, in intermediate temperature conditions; Air temperature adjustment ring A (mixing hot and cold air) Red section = hot air Blue section = cold air 74 F1A0051 Climate control system on/off button E Press the button (button LED on) to turn the climate control system on. Press the button again (button LED off) to turn the climate control system off. IMPORTANT 2) The air conditioning system uses R134a or R1234yf refrigerant compatible with the regulations in force in the countries where the vehicle is sold. When charging, only use the gas indicated on the dedicated plate in the engine compartment . The use of other coolants affects the efficiency and condition of the system. The lubricant used for the compressor is also strictly linked to the type of cooling gas, please refer to a Fiat Dealership. AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (for versions/markets, where provided) 2) CONTROLS A AUTO button for automatic control of all functions. B Air distribution selection button. C Display. D MAX DEF function control button. E System deactivation button. F Compressor on/off control button. G Air recirculation control button. H Fan speed increase/decrease control buttons. I Temperature increase/decrease control knob. 75 F1A0054 USING THE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM The system can be started in different ways, but it is advisable to start by pressing the AUTO button and then turning the knob to set the temperature required on the display. The system will adjust the temperature, the quantity and the distribution of the air sent into the passenger compartment and, by managing the recirculation function, the activation of the climate control system compressor. During fully automatic operation, the only manual intervention required is the possible activation of the following functions: air recirculation (to keep the recirculation constantly on or constantly off); to speed up demisting/defrosting of windscreen, rear window and external rear view mirrors. During fully automatic system operation, you can change the set temperature, air distribution and fan speed at any time by using the relevant buttons or knobs: the system will automatically change its settings to adjust to the new requirements. During fully automatic operation (FULL AUTO), the word FULL will disappear if the air distribution and/or flow rate and/or engagement of the compressor and/or recirculation settings are changed. In this way, the functions will switch from automatic to manual control until the AUTO button is pressed again. IMPORTANT 3) The air conditioning system uses R134a or R1234yf refrigerant compatible with the regulations in force in the countries where the vehicle is sold. When charging, only use the gas indicated on the dedicated plate in the engine compartment . The use of other coolants affects the efficiency and condition of the system. The lubricant used for the compressor is also strictly linked to the type of cooling gas, please refer to a Fiat Dealership. 37 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE ADDITIONAL HEATER (for versions/markets, where provided) On some versions, an additional heater is also present beneath the driver's seat. The fan for this heater is operated by means of the button (F) located on the control panel fig. 76. (for versions/markets, where provided) The vehicle is available, on request, with two different independent heaters: one fully automatic, the other which can be programmed. AUTOMATIC VERSION The additional heater is turned on in automatic mode when the engine is started and the required outside temperature and coolant conditions are present. Deactivation is always automatic. F MODE 76 INDEPENDENT ADDITIONAL HEATER 35) F1A0305 WARNING During periods with low outdoor temperatures when the device cuts in, check that the fuel level is always higher than the reserve level. Otherwise the device could lock and require the assistance of a Fiat Dealership. PROGRAMMABLE VERSION The additional heater operates completely independently of engine operation and allows the following: heat the passenger compartment 38 with the engine off; defrosting the windows; heat the engine coolant and then the engine itself prior to starting. The system consists of: a diesel burner for heating the water with an exhaust silencer for the combustion gases; a metering pump connected to the reservoir pipes for supplying the burner; a heat exchanger connected to the engine cooling system pipes; a control unit connected to the passenger compartment heating/ventilation system to allow automatic operation; an electronic control unit for controlling and adjusting the built-in burner; a digital timer fig. 77 for turning the heater on manually or for programming the time it comes on. WARNING The heater is equipped with a thermal limiter that cuts off combustion in the case of overheating due to insufficient coolant/coolant leaks. In this case, after repairing the fault in the cooling system and/or topping up the fluid, press the program selection button before turning the heater back on. Programmed activation of heating Before programming system activation, it is essential to set the time. Digital timer fig. 77 77 F1A0057 (1) Time/timer display (2) Ventilation warning light (3) Hour forward adjustment button (4) Program selection button (5) Clock pre-selection recall number (6) Activation button for immediate heating (7) Time adjustment/reading warning light (8) Hour back adjustment button (9) Heating cycle warning light Heating turned on immediately To switch the system on manually, press the button (6) of the timer: the display and warning light (9) will light up and remain on the entire time the system is working. Switching on time will disappear after 10 seconds. Setting the current time Keep button (4) pressed: the display and warning light (7) will switch on; At the same time, within 10 seconds, press buttons (3) or (8) to select the exact time; Release the button (4). When the display goes off, the current time is stored. Continuing to press the buttons (3) or (8) will move the digits on the clock forwards or backwards faster. Time setting is not possible when the heating or ventilation functions are active. WARNING Pay attention to the daylight saving time/standard time setting. Programming the switching on time To program the activation time: press the button (4): the symbol (10) or the time set previously and the number (5) corresponding to the preselection recalled will light up in the display for 10 seconds. WARNING If you wish to recall other preselected times, press button (4) from time to time within 10 seconds.Within 10 seconds, press buttons (3) or (8) to select the desired switching on time. WARNING The confirmation that the time has been memorised is given by:the disappearance of the switching on time;the presence of the pre-selection number (5);the lighting of the display. WARNING When the boiler comes on:the flame warning light (9)switches on in the display;the pre-selection number (5) goes out. Standard settings: Preselected time 1: 6:00 Preselected time 2: 16:00 Preselected time 3: 22:00 WARNING Factory pre-settings are cancelled with a new setting. Preselected times are stored until the following change. If the clock is detached from the on-board network (e.g. if the battery is disconnected), the factory pre-settings are restored. Deactivation of the programmed switching on time To delete the programmed activation time, press button (4) briefly: the 39 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE display lighting will go off and the number (5) relating to the preselected time will disappear. Recalling one of the preselected switching on times Operate button (4) within 10 seconds until the program number with the desired preselected time is displayed. The preselected time you have chosen to set is automatically activated after about 10 seconds without the need for any further confirmation with another button. Activate the preselected time taking into account the safety instructions for the operation of the independent heating (for this purpose consult the Owner Handbook for use of independent heating). WARNING Independent heating switches on at the preselected time, both with vehicle parked and while driving. WARNING The programmed switching on time can be altered or cancelled by following the instructions given previously. Operation duration setting Hold the button pressed. 40 Hold button (3) or (8) pressed at the same time. The time and warning light (7) are displayed. Press the button 4 again and hold it down. Hold button (3) or (8) pressed at the same time. The preset activation duration is displayed and warning light (9) or (2) flashes. Set the activation duration with button (3) or (8). The set activation duration is stored as soon as the text in the display disappears, or pressing button (4). Switching the heating system off Deactivation of the system, depending on the type of activation (automatic or manual), may be: automatic when the programmed duration is over; when the set time is over, the display switches off. manual pressing the “immediate heating” button on the timer again (flame button 6). The heating warning light and the display light are switched off. The fluid circulation pump keeps working for approximately two minutes: the heater can be switched back on again during this time. WARNING The parking heater goes off when battery voltage is low to allow the vehicle to be started. WARNING Before turning on the device, ensure that the fuel level is above the reserve. Otherwise the device could lock and require the assistance of a Fiat Dealership. Always turn off the heater when refuelling and near service stations to avoid the risk of explosion or fire hazards. Do not park the vehicle on inflammable material such as paper, grass or dry leaves: fire hazard! The temperature near the heater should not exceed 120°C (e.g. during oven painting in a body shop). The electronic control unit components may be damaged at higher temperatures. Whilst the heater is operating with the engine switched off, it absorbs energy from the battery; the engine should therefore be left running for a while to make sure that the battery is properly recharged. To check the coolant level, follow the instructions in the "Engine coolant" paragraph. The water in the heating circuit must contain a minimum percentage of 10% antifreeze. For maintenance and repairs, consult only a Fiat Dealership and use only original parts. MAINTENANCE Have the additional heater checked regularly at a Fiat Dealership (and always at the start of every winter). This will guarantee safe and economic operation of the heater as well as a long duration. ADDITIONAL REAR HEATING (Panorama and Combi) (for versions/markets, where provided) Panorama and Combi versions are equipped with a main heating system plus an additional system (as an option) with a control on the roof lining above the second row of seats fig. 78. For it to operate, it must be enabled using the button (F) fig. 79 on the control panel. 78 F1A0062 F MODE 79 F1A0305 Turn the knob (D) to the maximum cold position (knob at blue sector); air at ambient temperature will come out of the rear footwell vents (located under the seats in the 2nd -3rd row for Panorama versions and the grille on the left wheel arch side for Combi versions); Turn the knob (D) to the maximum heating position (knob at red sector); warm air will emerge (with the engine warmed up), from the rear footwell outlets (located under the seat in the 2nd and 3rd row for Panorama versions and the grille on the left wheel arch side for Combi versions). ADDITIONAL REAR CLIMATE CONTROL (Panorama and Combi) (for versions/markets, where provided) Panorama and Combi versions are equipped with a main heating/air conditioning system plus an additional system (as an option) with a control on the roof lining above the second row of seats fig. 78. Button (F) fig. 79 on the control panel must be enabled for operation; the air conditioning only works if the main climate control system is on. When the knob (D) is placed in the fully cold position (control in blue sector) cold air comes out the vents in the ceiling. Turn the knob (D) to the maximum heating position (knob at red sector);warm air will emerge (with the engine warmed up), from the rear footwell outlets (located under the seats in the 2nd and 3rd row for Panorama versions and the grille on the left wheel arch side for Combi versions). If the selector knob (D) is placed in the intermediate positions, the air will be distributed between the vents in the ceiling and the rear footwell vents, varying the temperature. WARNING If the compressor on the main climate control system control is turned on (operation of button E), even if the additional climate control system fan is in position 0, the 1st speed will automatically be activated to prevent 41 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE ice formation, with possible damage to the component. WARNING 35) The heater burns fuel in the same way as the engine, though to a lesser extent. To prevent poisoning and asphyxiation, the supplementary heater must never be turned on, not even for short periods, in closed environments such as a garage or workshops without extraction fans for the exhaust gases. ELECTRIC WINDOWS ELECTRIC Switches fig. 80 on the inner armrest of the driver's door control the following with the ignition key in the MAR position: (A): left front window opening/closing; (B): right front window opening/closing. Continuous automatic operation Keep one of the buttons pressed for longer than half a second to operate the automatic continuous window operation function. The window stops when it reaches the end of travel position, or when the button is pressed again. WARNING With the ignition key in the STOP position or extracted, the electric windows remain activated for about 3 minutes and are deactivated immediately when one of the doors is opened. Front passenger side door A dedicated switch for operating the window is located on the inner armrest of the passenger side front door. 36) due to accidental operation of the electric windows. BONNET OPENING Proceed as follows: open the driver's door to gain access to the bonnet release; pull the lever fig. 81 in the direction indicated by the arrow; lift lever (A) fig. 82 as shown in the figure; lift the bonnet and, at the same time, release the supporting rod fig. 83 from its locking device (D), then insert the end of the rod (C) fig. 84 into housing (E) in the bonnet. WARNING Before opening the bonnet, check that windscreen wiper arms are not lifted from the windscreen. WARNING 80 42 F1A0125 36) Improper use of the electric windows can be dangerous. Before and during operation, always check that nobody is exposed to the risk of being injured either directly by the moving window or through objects getting caught or hit by it. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid the risk of injury to anyone remaining in the vehicle 81 F1A0126 38) The bonnet may drop suddenly if the supporting rod is not positioned correctly. 39) Perform these operations only when the vehicle is stationary. HEAD RESTRAINTS FRONT 82 F1A0339 CLOSING Proceed as follows: hold the bonnet up with one hand and with the other remove rod (C) fig. 84 from recess (E) and fit it back into its catch (D) fig. 83; lower the bonnet to approximately 20 centimetres from the engine compartment and let it drop. Make sure that the bonnet is completely closed and not only fastened by the locking device by trying to open it. If it is not perfectly closed, do not try to press the bonnet down but open it and repeat the procedure. WARNING Always check that the bonnet is closed correctly to prevent it from opening while the vehicle is travelling. 83 F1A0349 85 84 F1A0129 F1A0039 On certain versions the head restraints are adjustable in height and they lock automatically in the required position. 40) WARNING 37) For safety reasons, the bonnet must always be properly closed while driving. Therefore, make sure that the bonnet is properly closed and that the lock is engaged. If you discover that the bonnet is not perfectly closed while driving, stop immediately and close the bonnet in the correct manner. Adjustment Upward adjustment: lift the head restraint until it clicks into place. Downward adjustment: press button (A) fig. 85 and lower the head restraint. To extract the rear head restraints press buttons (A) and (B) fig. 85 at the side of the two supports simultaneously and lift them out upwards. 37) 38) 39) 43 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING 40) All adjustments must be carried out only with the vehicle stationary and the engine off. Head restraints must be adjusted so that the head, rather than the neck, rests on them. Only in this case they can protect your head correctly. To maximise the protective action provided by the head restraint, adjust the seat backrest so that your trunk is upright and keep your head as close to the head restraint as possible. INTERIOR FITTINGS COMPARTMENT BENEATH PASSENGER SIDE FRONT SEAT Proceed as follows to use the compartment: Open the flap (A) fig. 86 and remove it as shown; turn the lock knob (B) anticlockwise and remove it to allow the compartment to be removed. 44 86 F1A0095 USB PORTS (for versions/markets where provided) They can be located: in the centre of the dashboard in place of the cigar lighter and can be used only as a charging source for external devices; on the central tunnel, above the smartphone pocket fig. 87, for the connection of USB remote devices (see explanation in the "USB Support" section of the "MULTIMEDIA" chapter for Uconnect 3" or Uconnect 5"). 87 F1A0487 POWER SOCKET (for versions/markets, where provided) The power socket is located in the centre console near the cigar lighter. To use it, open the cover (A) fig. 88. 88 F1A0308 TABLET HOLDER (for versions/markets, where provided) It is located in the centre of the dashboard and is designed to anchor a tablet. Proceed as follows to use fig. 89: lower the lever (A) to open the locking devices (B); fit the tablet between the locking devices (B); lift the lever (A) to ensure that the device is locked. TACHOGRAPH For tachograph operation and use, consult the owner handbook supplied by the device manufacturer. The tachograph must be installed on the vehicle when the vehicle weight (with or without trailer) exceeds 3.5 tons. 90 F1A0999 44) 41) 42) 43) WARNING 89 F1A0342 OPEN STORAGE COMPARTMENT (for versions/markets where provided) On some versions, there is a storage compartment in the middle of the dashboard fig. 90. 41) The cigar lighter becomes very hot. Handle it carefully and make sure children do not touch it: risk of fire and/or burning. 42) Do not use the desk in vertical position with the vehicle in motion. 43) To prevent dangerous situations, moving the tablet holder and using the device are prohibited while driving. 44) Never place potentially dangerous items in the open compartment on the dashboard; in the event of a collision, they may be flung into the passenger compartment and injure the occupants. WARNING Anyone making changes to the monitoring device or signal transmission system that affects recording by the monitoring instrument, particularly if this is done for purposes of fraud, may be in breach of criminal or administrative state regulations. WARNING If a tachograph is fitted, if the vehicle is parked for more than 5 days, it is advisable to disconnect the negative battery terminal to maintain its charge. IMPORTANT NOTES Do not use abrasive detergents or solvents to clean the device. To clean the device externally, use a damp cloth or special products for the care of synthetic materials. The tachograph is installed and sealed by authorised personnel: do not try and access the device or the supply and recording leads in any way. It is the responsibility of the owner of the 45 KNOWING YOUR VEHICLE vehicle on which the tachograph is installed to check the device regularly. The check must be carried out at least every two years and a test must be carried out to ensure it is operating properly. Ensure that the data label is renewed after every check that that the label contains the specified data. SELF-LEVELLING AIR SUSPENSION F1A0170 Manual adjustment GENERAL INFORMATION The system only acts on the rear wheels. The system maintains the rear ride setting for the vehicle constant in any loading condition, while ensuring a greater driving comfort. HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT There are 7 pre-defined levels for the free height from the ground: from “ride -3" to “ride 0" till “ride +3". The trim is shown on the multifunction display Automatic adjustment Whilst driving, the system automatically restores the vehicle to "position 0" and keeps it constant. While adjusting, the LED located on the button ((A) or (B) fig. 91) corresponding to the direction of travel, flashes. 46 91 Possible causes may be as follows: insufficient air reserve: the function is restored by starting the engine; the system has reached a threshold working temperature: wait a few minutes to let it cool down before operating the buttons again. The level selected with the vehicle stationary is maintained up to a speed of about 20 km/h; when this speed is exceeded, the system will automatically restore the normal level: "position 0". 5) With the vehicle stationary and the engine on or off, the desired height level can be set. Pressing button (A), for less than 1 second, selects the next level up. Keeping button (A) pressed for more than 1 second directly selects the maximum level: "position +3". Pressing button (B), for less than 1 second, selects the next level down. Keeping button (B) pressed for more than 1 second directly selects the minimum level: "position -3". While adjusting, the LED located on the button ((A) or (B) ) corresponding to the direction of travel, flashes. If, after selecting a button, the LED remains lit up (for about 5 seconds) rather than flashing, this means that the adjustment is temporarily unavailable. WARNING 5) Before manually adjusting with doors open, make sure there is enough space around the vehicle for this kind of operation. ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER PROVISION FOR FITTING TELEPASS ON REFLECTIVE WINDSCREEN (for versions/markets, where provided) If the vehicle is equipped with a reflective windscreen, install the Telepass in the appropriate area shown in fig. 92 - fig. 93. 92 93 F1A0311 F1A0310 47 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL 48 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL This section of the handbook gives you all the information you need to understand, interpret and use the instrument panel correctly. DASHBOARD AND INSTRUMENT PANEL........................................ DISPLAY ..................................... TRIP COMPUTER ........................ WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................................ 49 53 55 56 DASHBOARD AND INSTRUMENT PANEL Versions with multifunction display 94 F1A0356 A. Speedometer B. Display C. Rev counter D. Engine coolant temperature indicator with overheating warning light E. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light 49 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL Right-hand drive versions with multifunction display 95 F1A0357 A. Speedometer B. Display C. Rev counter D. Engine coolant temperature indicator with overheating warning light E. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light 50 Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display 96 F1A0994 A. Speedometer B. Display C. Rev counter D. Engine coolant temperature indicator with overheating warning light E. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light 51 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL Right-hand drive versions with reconfigurable multifunction display 97 F1A0977 A. Speedometer B. Display C. Rev counter D. Engine coolant temperature indicator with overheating warning light E. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light 6) IMPORTANT 6) If the needle for the engine coolant temperature reaches the red area, stop the engine immediately and contact a Fiat Dealership. 52 DISPLAY (for versions/markets, where provided) The vehicle may be equipped with a multifunction display or with a reconfigurable multifunction display, able to display information that is useful and necessary when driving. MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY “STANDARD” SCREEN The standard screen fig. 98 shows the following information: N.B. When one of the front doors is opened, the display is activated, showing the time and mileage for a few seconds. RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY "STANDARD" SCREEN The standard screen fig. 99 shows the following information: 99 98 F1A1040 A Date B Milometer (display of kilometres, or miles, travelled) C Time D Outside temperature E Headlamp alignment position (only with dipped headlamps on). F1A1041 A Time B Date or trip distance display in kilometres (or miles) C Milometer (display of distance travelled in kilometres/miles) D Headlight alignment position (only with dipped beam headlights on) E: Outside temperature (for versions/markets, where provided) GEAR SHIFT INDICATOR (for versions/markets, where provided) The GSI system (Gear Shift Indicator) advises the drives when to shift gear via a dedicated indication on the instrument panel. Through the GSI, the driver is notified that changing gear will allow a reduction in fuel consumption. When the SHIFT UP icon ( SHIFT) is shown on the display, the GSI is advising the driver to engage a higher gear, while the SHIFT DOWN ( SHIFT) icon advises the driver to engage a lower gear. WARNING The indication in the display remains on until the driver shifts gear or the driving conditions go back to a situation where shifting gear is not required to improve consumption. ENGINE OIL LEVEL GAUGE (for versions/markets, where provided) The gauge shows the level of oil in the engine in a graphic form. To see the oil level: turn the key to MAR and wait for approximately 3 seconds; the oil level will appear on the display fig. 100 - fig. 101 by turning five symbols on/off. 53 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL Versions with multifunction display CONTROL BUTTONS WARNING To find out the correct oil quantity, always check using the dipstick (see “Checking levels" paragraph in "Technical Data" chapter). 100 F1A0354 Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display Liv.olio MIN 101 MAX F1A0355 The gradual switching off of the symbols indicates a decreasing oil level. Four or five symbols light up to indicate a sufficient level of oil in the sump. If the fifth symbol is not lit, this does not indicate a fault or that insufficient oil is present in the sump. If the oil level is lower than the minimum required value, the display shows a dedicated message indicating minimum 54 engine oil level and the need for a topup. After a few seconds, the symbol display indicating the amount of engine oil disappears and: if the next scheduled servicing intervention is approaching, the time to the next service is displayed and the O symbol lights up on the display. When the service interval has expired a dedicated alert will be shown on the display. later on, if the time for changing the engine oil is getting close, the distance until the next oil change will appear on the display. When the service interval has expired a dedicated alert will be shown on the display. WARNING The oil level indication will not appear on the display if the engine was stopped for less than 6 minutes. MODE 102 F1A0304 To scroll up through the screen and the related options or to increase the displayed value. MODE Press briefly to access the menu and/or go to next screen or to confirm the desired selection. Hold down to go back to the standard screen. To scroll down through the screen and the related options or to decrease the displayed value. N.B. Buttons and activate different functions according to the following situations: Adjusting the vehicle interior lighting with the side lights on and standard screen active, it is possible to adjust the brightness inside the vehicle. Setup menu within the menu, they allow you to scroll up and down; to increase or decrease values during settings. SETUP MENU Setup menu functions The Setup menu can be activated by pressing the MODE button briefly. The menu comprises the following functions: Menu Dimmer Headlight alignment corrector Speed buzzer Headlight sensor Cornering lights Rain sensor Trip B activation Traffic sign Set time Set date Autoclose Units Language Warning volume Service Passenger's airbag Daytime running lights Automatic main beam headlights Brake Control (where present) versions with reconfigurable multifunction display Blind Spot (where present) versions with reconfigurable multifunction display Quit menu or to scroll Press buttons the Setup menu options. Operating modes are different according to the characteristics of the option selected. With the Uconnect™ system, some Menu items are shown and managed on the display of the latter and not on the instrument panel display (see the paragraphs on theUconnect™ system in the "Multimedia" chapter). TRIP COMPUTER Trip A allows the display of the following parameters: Outside Temperature Range Distance travelled A Average consumption A Instant consumption Average speed A Travel time A (driving time) Reset Trip A "Trip B", available on multifunction display only, is used to display the values relating to: Distance travelled B Average consumption B Average speed B Trip time B (driving time). 7) IN BRIEF The Trip computer is used to display information on vehicle operation when the ignition key is turned to MAR. This function allows you to define two separate trips, called "Trip A" and "Trip B", for monitoring the "complete mission" (journey) of the vehicle in a reciprocally independent manner. Both functions can be reset (reset means start of a new journey). Exit Trip You can automatically exit the TRIP function once all the values have been displayed or by holding the MODE button down for more than 1 second. IMPORTANT 7) The "Trip B" function may be disabled (see the "Activating Trip B" paragraph). "Range" and "Instantaneous fuel consumption" information can not be reset. 55 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES The warning light switches on together with (where the instrument panel permits) a specific message and/or acoustic warning. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner Handbook, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. In the event of a failure indication, always refer to the contents of this chapter. WARNING The failure indicators appearing on the display are divided into two categories: very serious and less serious faults. Serious faults are indicated by a repeated and prolonged warning "cycle". Less serious faults are indicated by a warning "cycle" with a shorter duration. The display cycle of both categories can be interrupted. The instrument panel warning light will stay on until the cause of the malfunction is eliminated. Warning lights on panel What it means LOW BRAKE FLUID/HANDBRAKE ENGAGED The warning light switches on when the key is turned to MAR-ON, but it should switch off after a few seconds. red 56 What to do Low brake fluid level The warning light turns on when the level of the brake fluid in the reservoir falls below the minimum level, possibly due to a leak in the circuit. Restore the brake fluid level, then check that the warning light has switched off. If the warning light turns on when travelling (on certain versions together with the message on the display) stop the vehicle immediately and contact a Fiat Dealership. Handbrake engaged The warning light switches on when the handbrake is engaged. Release the handbrake, then check that the warning light has switched off. If the warning light stays on, contact a Fiat Dealership. What it means red amber EBD FAILURE The simultaneous switching on of the (red), (amber) and (amber) warning lights (for versions/markets, where provided), with the engine on, indicates either a failure of the EBD system or that the system is not available. In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly lock and the vehicle may swerve when braking sharply. The display shows the dedicated message. What to do Drive very carefully to the nearest Fiat Dealership to have the system inspected immediately. amber red red AIR BAG FAILURE The warning light switches on when the ignition key is turned to MAR, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light stays on constantly if there is a failure in the airbag system. On some versions the display shows the dedicated message. SEAT BELTS REMINDER (for versions/markets, where provided) The warning light switches on constantly with the vehicle stationary and the driver’s seat belt not fastened. The warning light flashes and a buzzer will sound if the vehicle is in motion and the driver’s seat belt is not correctly fastened. 45) 46) For permanent deactivation of the acoustic signal (buzzer) of the SBR. (Seat Belt Reminder) system contact a Fiat Dealership. With the multifunction display, you can also reactivate the system through the Setup menu. 57 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL What it means red red 58 What to do ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE TOO HIGH The warning light switches on when the ignition key is turned to MAR, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light turns on when the engine is overheated. N.B. The screen-printed icon indicating excessive engine coolant temperature is only provided on versions with reconfigurable multifunction display. The display shows the dedicated message. In normal driving conditions: stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and check that the water level in the reservoir is not below the MIN mark. In this case, wait for the engine to cool down, then slowly and carefully open the cap, top up with coolant and check that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the reservoir itself. Also check visually for any fluid leaks. If, when restarting, the warning light switches on again, contact a Fiat Dealership. If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. in high-performance driving): slow down and, if the warning light stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for two or three minutes with the engine running and slightly accelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation, then turn the engine off. Check that the coolant level is correct as described above. IMPORTANT Over demanding routes, it is advisable to keep the engine running and slightly accelerated for a few minutes before turning it off. LOW BATTERY CHARGE The warning light switches on when the ignition key is turned to MAR, but it should switch off as soon as the engine has started (with the engine idling a brief delay before switching off is acceptable). If the warning light stays on, contact a Fiat Dealership immediately. LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE When the ignition key is turned to MAR the warning light (versions with multifunction display) or the symbol (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) switches on, but it should switch off as soon as the engine is started. The warning light (or symbol) witches on constantly together with the alert in the display when the system detects that the engine oil pressure is insufficient. 8) What it means red red DECAYED ENGINE OIL (MultiJet versions with DPF only) The warning light starts to flash together with an alert on the display (for versions/markets, where provided) when the system detects that the engine oil has deteriorated. If the warning light flashes, this does not mean that the vehicle is faulty, but simply informs the driver that it is now necessary to change the engine oil as a result of regular vehicle use. If the oil is not changed, warning will also come on and engine operation is light limited to 3000 rpm when a second threshold is reached. If the oil is still not changed, when a third deterioration threshold is reached, the engine is limited to 1500 rpm to prevent damage. What to do Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. 47) 48) Remember that the deterioration of the engine oil is accelerated by: mainly town use of the vehicle which makes the DPF regeneration process more frequent use of the vehicle for short trips, preventing the engine from reaching operating temperature repeated interruptions to the regeneration process signalled by the DPF warning light coming on. INCOMPLETE DOOR/LOAD COMPARTMENT CLOSURE The warning light (versions with multifunction display) or the symbol (versions with multifunction display) switches on, on some versions, when one or more doors or the load compartment are not perfectly closed. On some versions, the display shows a specific alert that indicates that the left/right front door or rear/load compartment door is open. A buzzer will sound when doors/tailgate are open and the vehicle is moving. 59 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL What it means red red amber 60 POWER STEERING FAILURE (for versions with SERVOTRONIC) The warning light switches on when the ignition key is turned to MAR, but it should switch off after a few seconds. If the warning light stays on together with the message shown on the display and a buzzer, the power steering is ineffective and the effort on the steering wheel increases significantly even though the vehicle can be steered. What to do Contact a Fiat Dealership. SELF-LEVELLING SUSPENSION FAILURE (for versions/markets, where provided) When the ignition key is turned to MAR the warning light (versions with multifunction display) or the symbol (versions with multifunction display) switches on, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light (or symbol) switches in the event of a failure in the self-levelling suspension system. EOBD/INJECTION SYSTEM FAILURE In normal conditions, when the ignition key is turned to MAR the warning light switches on, but it should switch off as soon as the engine is started. The operation of the warning light may be checked by the traffic police using specific devices. Comply with the laws and regulations of the country where you are driving. 9) What it means amber amber amber What to do If the warning light stays on or switches on when driving, it means that the injection system is not working properly; in particular, if the warning light comes on constantly, this indicates a malfunction in the supply/ignition system that could cause excessive exhaust emissions, a possible loss of performance, poor driveability and high fuel consumption. On some versions the display shows the dedicated message. The warning light switches off if the malfunction disappears, but is still stored by the system. Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue travelling at moderate speed without demanding excessive effort from the engine. Prolonged use of the vehicle with the warning light on may cause damage. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. AdBlue® (UREA) INJECTION SYSTEM FAILURE The warning light switches on, together with a dedicated message on the display (for versions/markets, where provided) if a fluid not conforming with the nominal characteristics is inserted or if an average consumption of AdBlue® (UREA) over 50% is detected. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. If the problem is not solved, a specific message will appear on the instrument panel display whenever a certain threshold is reached until it will no longer be possible to start the engine. When 200 km are left before you will no longer be able to restart the engine, a continuous dedicated message will appear on the dashboard (for versions/markets, where provided) accompanied by an acoustic warning sound. ABS FAILURE The warning light switches on when the ignition key is turned to MAR, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light switches on to indicate a system fault. In this case the braking system maintains its efficiency unaltered but without the advantage of the ABS system. The display shows the dedicated message. Drive carefully and contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. 61 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL What it means FUEL RESERVE The warning light switches on when the ignition key is turned to MAR, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light switches on when there are about 10/12 litres of fuel (for versions with tank capacity 75/90 litres) or 9 litres (for versions with tank capacity 60 litres) remaining in the tank. The warning light will blink to indicate a system fault. If this is the case, go to a Fiat Dealership to have the system checked. GLOW PLUG PREHEATING / GLOW PLUG PREHEATING FAILURE Glow plugs This warning light switches on when the key is turned to MAR. It will switch off as soon as the glow plugs have reached a preset temperature. IMPORTANT When it is particularly warm outside, the warning light stays on for an extremely short time. Start the engine as soon as the warning light switches off. Glow plug preheating failure The warning light flashes if there is a fault in the preheating system. On some versions the display shows the dedicated message. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. LOW AdBlue® (UREA) DIESEL EMISSIONS ADDITIVE LEVEL WARNING (for versions/markets, where provided) The ® (UREA) Diesel Emissions Additive low level warning light lights up if the vehicle has a low level of AdBlue® (UREA). Fill the AdBlue® (UREA) tank amber amber amber 62 What to do amber amber What it means What to do VEHICLE PROTECTION SYSTEM FAILURE - FIAT CODE When the ignition key is turned to MAR the warning light (versions with multifunction display) or the symbol (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) should flash once then switch off. When the warning light (or symbol) comes on constantly, with key at MAR, this indicates: a potential failure (see explanations in the "The Fiat Code system" paragraph of the "Knowing your vehicle" chapter). a possible break-in attempt with an alarm; in this case the warning light switches off after approximately 10 seconds. will blink with the engine running The warning light to indicate that the vehicle is not protected by the engine immobiliser. Contact a Fiat Dealership to have all the keys stored in the memory. REAR FOG LIGHTS The warning light comes on when the rear fog lights are turned on. GENERAL FAILURE INDICATION The warning light (versions with multifunction display) or symbol (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) switches on during the following events: If the fuel inertia cut-off switch is activated amber Light failure (rear fog lamps, direction indicators, brake lights, number plate lights, side lights, daytime running lights, main beam automatism, trailer direction indicators, trailer side lights) The failure relating to these lights could be: one or more blown bulbs, a blown protection fuse or a break in the electrical connection. 63 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL 64 What it means Airbag warning light failure (generic failure warning light flashing) amber Rain sensor failure Diesel filter sensor failure Trailer connection failure Audio system failure Engine oil pressure sensor failure Parking sensor failure Water in diesel fuel filter On versions with a multifunction display, the warning light also turns on during the following events: Engine oil level sensor failure Insufficient engine oil level Low engine oil pressure warning light failure What to do In this case, the warning light (or symbol) may not indicate any faults with the restraint systems. Before continuing, contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to have the fault fixed. What it means amber amber amber DPF (PARTICULATE FILTER) CLEANING UNDERWAY (for versions/markets, where provided) When the ignition key is turned to MAR the warning light (versions with multifunction display) or the symbol (versions with multifunction display) switches on, but it should switch off after a few seconds. The warning light switches on constantly to alert the driver that the DPF system needs to eliminate the trapped pollutants (particulate) through the regeneration process. A specific message will appear on the display when the warning light (or symbol) comes on (for versions/markets, where provided). IMPORTANT Failure to observe the appropriate procedure for a long distance when the warning light to come comes on, can cause the warning light on, resulting in the need to go to a Fiat Dealership to restore correct DPF operation. What to do The warning light (or symbol) does not come on during every DPF regeneration, but only when driving conditions require that the driver is notified. The warning light will go off if the vehicle stays in motion until regeneration has been completed. The process normally takes about 15 minutes. Optimum conditions for completing the process are achieved by travelling at 60 km/h with engine revs above 2000 rpm. If this warning light (or symbol) comes on, it does not mean there is a vehicle defect, so there is no need to take it to a garage. 49) 10) ESC-ASR SYSTEM / TRACTION PLUS FAILURE On certain versions a dedicated message is displayed. Flashing of the warning light while driving indicates the intervention of the ESC system. If the warning light does not go out or remains on whilst driving, go to a Fiat Dealership. Hill Holder failure The warning light will turn on when the Hill Holder system is faulty. On certain versions a dedicated message is displayed. In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. BRAKE PAD WEAR The warning light (versions with multifunction display) or symbol (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) switches on if the front or rear brake pads are worn. On certain versions a dedicated message is displayed. Have them replaced as soon as possible. 65 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL What it means amber amber amber 66 What to do LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (DRIVING ADVISOR) (Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) The two warning lights on indicate that the system has started recognising the operating conditions. When the system recognises the operating conditions, it becomes active, i.e. it can assist the driver with visual and acoustic warnings. Therefore, the warning lights switch off. If the operating conditions are no longer present, the system is engaged but inactive, and therefore the two warning lights on the panel switch on. When the system is active, if the vehicle gets close to one of the side limit lines or one of the two demarcation lines of the lane, the driver is warned with an acoustic signal along with illumination of the direction indicator light (right or left) on the panel lighting up. The system failure is indicated by the two direction indicator lights and lighting up on the panel, along with an acoustic signal and a specific alert. TPMS TPMS failure The warning light flashes for about 75 seconds and then stays on constantly (along with a dedicated message on the display) to indicate that the system is temporarily deactivated or faulty. In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. Tyre pressure low The warning light turns on to indicate that the pressure of one or more tyres is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these circumstances, optimal tyre duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. In this case it is advisable to restore the correct pressure value. IMPORTANT Do not continue driving with one or more flat tyres as vehicle handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. What it means amber amber FULL BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM TRIGGERED OR FAILURE (for versions/markets, where provided) (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) The warning light switches on (together with a message on the display) if the system is triggered. The warning light and symbol, with dedicated message, switch on in case of obstruction, dirt or system unavailability. What to do Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. FULL BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM MANUAL DEACTIVATION OR RESTARTING (for versions/markets, where provided) (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) The warning light switches on constantly (together with a specific alert on the display) if the system is manually deactivated, or temporarily until it is restarted. DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS The warning light switches on when the dipped beam headlights are turned on. green green FOLLOW ME HOME The warning light switches on (together with a message shown on the display) when this device is in use (see explanations in "Follow me home device" paragraph in "Exterior lights" in the "Knowing your vehicle" chapter). LEFT DIRECTION INDICATOR The warning light switches on when the direction indicator control stalk is moved downwards or, together with the right direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed. 67 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL What it means green green green green blue 68 RIGHT DIRECTION INDICATOR The warning light switches on when the direction indicator control stalk is moved upwards or, together with the left direction indicator, when the hazard warning light button is pressed. FOG LIGHTS The warning light comes on when the front fog lights are turned on. CRUISE CONTROL (for versions/markets, where provided) This warning light switches on when the ignition key is turned to MAR, but it should switch off after a few seconds, if the Cruise Control is deactivated. The warning light on the instrument panel when the Cruise Control selector wheel is turned to ON or , depending on the version. On certain versions a dedicated message is displayed. AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM (High Beam Control) headlights This warning light comes on when the automatic main beam headlights are activated. MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS The warning light switches on when the main beam headlights are turned on. What to do WARNING 45) If the warning light does not switch on when the key is turned to MAR or if it stays on while driving (together with the message on the display), there may be an anomaly in the restraint systems; in this case, the airbags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or, in a lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before continuing, contact a Fiat Dealership to have the system checked immediately. 46) The failure of the warning light is indicated by the warning light flashing or, depending on the version, by the icon constantly on in the display. In this case, the warning light may not indicate a possible problem with the airbag restraint system. Before continuing, contact a Fiat Dealership to have the system checked immediately. 47) Degraded engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the warning light comes on, and never more than 500 km after it first comes on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the warranty. Remember that when this warning light comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil. 48) If the warning light flashes while driving, contact a Fiat Dealership. 49) Always drive at a speed appropriate to the traffic conditions, the weather and traffic regulations. The engine may be stopped if the DPF light is on; however, repeated interruption of the regeneration process may result in premature deterioration of the engine oil. For this reason, always wait until the warning light switches off before stopping the engine as described above. It is not advisable to complete DPF regeneration with the vehicle stationary. IMPORTANT 8) If the warning light switches on while driving, stop the engine immediately and contact a Fiat Dealership. 9) If, when the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light does not switch on, switches on constantly or flashes while driving (on certain versions together with the message on the display), contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. 10) During regeneration, the fan could be operated. 69 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL 70 Messages on display What it means What to do EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILURE (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) The symbol switches on when a fault is detected on one of the following lights: direction indicators rear fog lights brake lights side lights daytime running lights number plate lights reversing lights main beam automatism trailer side lights trailer direction indicators The fault relating to these lights could be: one or more blown bulbs, a blown protection fuse or a break in the electrical connection. ENGINE OIL LEVEL WARNING LIGHT SENSOR FAILURE (for versions/markets, where provided) (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) The symbol lights up to indicate a failure of the engine oil level sensor warning light. On versions with multifunctional display, the "general failure" warning light comes on (see explanations in the "Warning lights on panel" section). Contact a Fiat Dealership. BRAKE LIGHT FAILURE (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) The symbol switches on when a fault is detected in the brake lights. The fault could be: one or more blown bulbs, a blown protection fuse or a break in the electrical connection. What it means What to do AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM (High Beam Control) headlights failure (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) The symbol switches on when a fault is detected in the automatic switching-on system for the main beam headlights. POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display: when the outside temperature reaches or falls below 3°C the outside temperature indication flashes to warn the driver about the possible presence of ice on the road. Versions with multifunction display: when the outside temperature reaches or falls below 3°C the display shows a specific alert to warn the driver about the possible presence of ice on the road. SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display: the symbol lights up and a specific alert appears on the display when the vehicle exceeds the set speed limit (see explanations in the "Reconfigurable multifunction display" section). Versions with multifunction display: a specific alert appears on the display when the vehicle exceeds the set speed limit (see explanations in the "Multifunction display" section). 71 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL What it means SCHEDULED SERVICING (for versions/markets, where provided) The symbol (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) switches on together with display of a specific alert next to the scheduled servicing warning and stays on until the service deadline is reached. The symbol switches off after the service has been carried out at a Fiat Dealership or once 1000 km have been covered from the service deadline. On versions with multifunctional display, only a specific alert is shown. SPEED LIMITER (for versions/markets, where provided) (versions with multifunction display) The symbol on the display switches on when the function is activated. On certain versions a dedicated message is displayed. FUEL CUT-OFF DEVICE INERTIA SWITCH TRIPPED (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) This symbol on the display switches on when the fuel cut-off device inertia switch has tripped. PARKING SENSOR FAILURE (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) The symbol switches on together with a dedicated message to indicate a failure of the park sensors. LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (DRIVING ADVISOR) SYSTEM FAILURE Versions with reconfigurable multifunction display: the symbol switches on in the display with the two direction indicator lights and , together with a beep and a specific alert. Versions with multifunction display: the display shows a specific alert. 72 What to do For the fuel cut-off inertia switch reactivation procedure, refer to the "Fuel cut-off switch" paragraph. If it is still not possible to restore the fuel supply, contact a Fiat Dealership. What it means What to do TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION FAILURE (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) The symbol switches on in the display together with a specific alert to indicate a failure of the Traffic Sign Recognition. LIMITED RANGE The display shows a dedicated message to warn the driver that the range of the vehicle is less than 50 km. ECO TURNING ON THE ECO FUNCTION (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) ECO is shown on the display with the "ECO" function is turned on by pressing the corresponding button on the dashboard. If the button is pressed again, the word ECO turns off. On some versions, a specific screen is displayed instead of the word "ECO". START&STOP SYSTEM ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION (for versions/markets, where provided) Start&Stop system activation A message will appear on the display when the Start&Stop system is activated. In this case the LED button is off (see the “Start&Stop" located on the paragraph). Start&Stop system deactivation A dedicated message will appear on the display when the Start&Stop system is deactivated. The LED over the button is on when the system is deactivated. START&STOP FAILURE The symbol appears on the display together with a specific alert in the event of a Start&Stop system failure. 73 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL What it means LOW AdBlue® (UREA) DIESEL EMISSIONS ADDITIVE LEVEL WARNING When a low AdBlue® (UREA) level is detected, a text message will appear on the instrument panel display alerting the driver that the AdBlue® (UREA) must be topped up, together with the symbol. The symbol stays on until the tank is topped up with at least 5 litres of AdBlue® (UREA). If you do not top up, a specific message will appear on the instrument panel display whenever a certain threshold is reached until it will no longer be possible to start the engine. A message will appear permanently on the display and a beep will be heard when there is about 200 km of range left. When the residual range is 0 km, a specific alert will appear on the display (for versions/markets, where provided). It will no longer be possible to restart the engine after it has been stopped. It will be possible to restart the engine after pouring at least 5 litres of AdBlue® (UREA) in to the tank. 50) WATER IN DIESEL FUEL FILTER (for versions/markets, where provided) (Diesel versions) (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) The symbol switches on constantly when driving (along with a message in the display), to indicate the presence of water in the diesel filter. 11) 74 What to do Top up the AdBlue® (UREA) tank as soon as possible with at least 5 litres of AdBlue® (UREA). If the top-up was done with a range of 0 km left in the AdBlue® (UREA) tank, you may need to wait 2 minutes before starting the engine. What it means What to do NATURAL POWER SYSTEM FAILURE (for Natural Power versions only) The symbol on the display turns on together with a dedicated message and the four methane levels turn off. In this case, contact a Fiat Dealership as quickly as possible. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATING The symbol appears to indicate an automatic transmission overheating. With engine off or at idle speed, wait until the symbol switches off. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FAILURE The two symbols switch on, together with a message on the display, when an automatic transmission fault is detected. The symbols and message remain on the display until the problem is solved. Go to a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. 75 KNOWING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL What it means BLIND SPOT ASSIST WITH TRAILER DETECTION "DRIVE MODE" function What to do BLIND SPOT ASSIST WITH TRAILER DETECTION (yellow) Sensor block: the symbol appears on the display when the Blind Spot Assist with Trailer Detection system sensor is blocked. In this case, the LEDs on the door mirrors are switched on continuously. Free the bumper of any obstacles or clean it. (yellow) System not available : the symbol appears on the display when the Blind Spot Assist with Trailer Detection system is not faulty. In this case, the LEDs on the door mirrors are switched on continuously. The failed operation of the system might be due to the insufficient voltage from the battery or other failures on the electrical system. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to have the electrical system checked. (red) Blind Spot Assist with Trailer Detection system fault: the symbol appears on the display when the Blind Spot Assist with Trailer Detection system is faulty. In this case, the LEDs on the door mirrors are switched off. An acoustic signal is also emitted. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. The required driving mode ("Normal", "Power" or "Eco") is indicated on the instrument panel display. WARNING 50) When the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is empty and the engine stops it is no longer possible to restart it until the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is topped up with at least 5 litres of AdBlue® (UREA). 76 IMPORTANT 11) The presence of water in the fuel supply circuit may cause severe damage to the injection system and irregular engine operation. If the symbol appears (on some versions together with the dedicated message on the display), contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to have the system bled. If the above indication occurs immediately after refuelling, water may have entered the tank: turn the engine off immediately and contact a Fiat Dealership. 77 SAFETY 78 SAFETY The chapter that you are about to read is very important: it describes the safety systems with which the vehicle is equipped and provides instructions on how to use them correctly. ABS ........................................... 79 ESC (Electronic Stability Control) SYSTEM ..................................... 80 TRACTION PLUS SYSTEM ............ 83 DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS ................................... 84 OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS ................................... 94 SEAT BELTS ............................... 94 SBR SYSTEM .............................. 95 PRE-TENSIONERS....................... 95 CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY ..... 97 SETUP FOR “UNIVERSAL ISOFIX" CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ................................... 101 SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - AIRBAG ............ 110 ABS This is an integral part of the braking system, which prevents one or more wheels from locking and slipping regardless of the road surface conditions and braking intensity, ensuring control of the vehicle even during emergency braking. The system intervenes during braking when the wheels are about to lock, typically in emergency braking or lowgrip conditions, when locking may be more frequent. The ABS ensures the direction of the vehicle while braking and optimises the braking distances at the same time. The system also improves control and stability of the vehicle when braking on a surface on which the grip of the left and right wheels differs, or when braking while cornering. The system is completed by EBD (Electronic Braking Force Distribution), which distributes the braking action between the front and rear wheels. WARNING To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 500 km is needed: during this period it is better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking. SYSTEM INTERVENTION The driver can feel that the ABS has come into action because the brake pedal pulsates slightly and the system gets noisier: it means that the vehicle speed should be altered to suit the type of road surface. 52) 53) 54) 55) 56) 57) 58) MSR (Motor Schleppmoment Regelung) SYSTEM This is an integral part of the ABS system and prevents the drive wheels from locking, which could happen, for example, if the accelerator pedal is released suddenly or in the case of shifting down suddenly in conditions of poor grip. In these conditions, the engine braking effect could cause the drive wheels to slip, resulting in a loss of vehicle stability. In these situations, the system intervenes, restoring torque to the engine in order to conserve vehicle stability and increase safety. WARNING driving on slippery surfaces and not take unnecessary risks. 52) When the ABS cuts in and you feel the brake pedal pulsating, do not remove your foot, but keep the pedal pushed down; in doing so you, will stop in the shortest distance possible under the road conditions at the time. 53) If the ABS intervenes, this indicates that the grip of the tyres on the road is nearing its limit: you must slow down to a speed compatible with the available grip. 54) The ABS cannot overrule the natural laws of physics, and cannot increase the grip available according to the condition of the road. 55) The ABS system cannot prevent accidents, including those due to excessive speed on corners, driving on low-grip surfaces or aquaplaning. 56) The capability of the ABS must never be tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in such a way as to compromise personal safety and the safety of others. 57) For the correct operation of the ABS, the tyres must of necessity be the same make and type on all wheels, in perfect condition and, above all, of the prescribed type and dimensions. 58) If the spare wheel (for versions/markets, where provided) is used, the ABS keeps operating. Always remember that the spare wheel, being smaller than the original wheel, provides less grip. 51) The ABS gets the most from the available grip, but it cannot improve it; you should therefore take every care when 51) 79 SAFETY 80 ESC (Electronic Stability Control) SYSTEM (for versions/markets, where provided) The ESC system improves the directional control and stability of the vehicle in various driving conditions. The ESC system corrects understeer and oversteer, distributing the brake force on the appropriate wheels. The torque supplied by the engine can also be reduced in order to maintain control of the vehicle. The ESC system uses the sensors in the vehicle to determine the trajectory required by the driver through steering and compares it with the real trajectory of the vehicle. When the real trajectory deviates from the desired trajectory, the ESC system intervenes to counter understeer or oversteer. Oversteer: occurs when the vehicle is turning more than it should according to the angle of the steering wheel. Understeer: occurs when the vehicle is turning less than it should according to the angle of the steering wheel. The ESC system also includes the following subsystems: Hill Holder ASR HBA ERM HDC 59) 60) 61) SYSTEM INTERVENTION This is signalled by the flashing of the warning light in the instrument panel, to inform the driver that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions. SYSTEM ACTIVATION The ESC system switches on automatically when the engine is started and cannot be switched off. HILL HOLDER SYSTEM This system is an integral part of the ESC system and facilitates starting on slopes. It is automatically activated in the following conditions: uphill: vehicle stationary on a road with a gradient higher than 5%, engine running, brake pressed and gearbox in neutral or gear (other than reverse) engaged; downhill: vehicle stationary on a road with a gradient higher than 5%, engine running, brake pressed and reverse gear engaged. When setting off, the ESC system control unit maintains the braking pressure on the wheels until the torque necessary for starting is reached, or in any case for a maximum of 2 seconds, allowing your right foot to be moved easily from the brake pedal to the accelerator. When the 2 seconds have elapsed, without starting, the system is automatically deactivated, gradually releasing the braking pressure. During this release stage, the typical brake disengagement noise indicating that the vehicle is going to move imminently will be heard. WARNING The Hill Holder system is not a parking brake; therefore, never leave the vehicle without having engaged the handbrake, turned the engine off and engaged first gear, so that it is parked in safe conditions (for further information read the "Parking" paragraph in the "Starting and driving" chapter). ASR (AntiSlip Regulation) SYSTEM It is an integral part of the ESC system. It automatically operates in the event of one or both drive wheels slipping, loss of grip on wet roads (aquaplaning) and acceleration on slippery, snowy or icy roads, etc. Depending on the slipping conditions, two different control systems are activated: if the slipping involves both drive wheels, the ASR intervenes reducing the power transmitted by the engine; if the slipping only involves one of the drive wheels, it intervenes automatically braking the wheel that is slipping. 62) Engagement/ disengagement of the ASR system The ASR is switched on automatically each time the engine is started. While driving, the ASR can be switched off and subsequently switched on again by pressing the ASR OFF button ((A) fig. 103). 63) On some versions, the intervention of the system is indicated by a message shown on the display. 103 F1A0324 When the system is not active, the LED on the button ASR OFF turns on and, on some versions, a message appears on the display. If the ASR is disengaged during driving, it is automatically reactivated when the vehicle is next started. When travelling on snowy roads with snow chains, it may be helpful to turn the ASR off: in fact, in these conditions, the driving wheels skidding when moving off gives you better traction. HBA (Hydraulic Brake Assist) SYSTEM The HBA system is designed to improve the braking capacity of the vehicle during emergency braking. The system detects an emergency braking by monitoring the speed and strength with which the brake pedal is pressed, thereby applying the optimal brake pressure. This can reduce the braking distance: the HBA system therefore completes the ABS. Maximum assistance from the HBA system is obtained pressing the brake pedal very quickly. In addition, the brake pedal must be pressed continuously during braking, avoiding intermittent presses, to benefit from the system. Do not reduce pressure on the brake pedal until braking is no longer necessary. The HBA system is deactivated when the brake pedal is released. 64) 65) 66) ERM (ELECTRONIC ROLLOVER MITIGATION) SYSTEM The system monitors the tendency of the wheels to rise from the ground if the driver performs extreme manoeuvres like quick steering to avoid an obstacle, especially in poor road conditions. If these conditions occur, the system intervenes on the brakes and engine power to reduce the possibility that the wheels are raised from the ground. It is not possible to avoid the tendency to roll over if this is due to reasons such as driving on high side gradients, collision with objects or other vehicles. 67) HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC) SYSTEM It is an integral part of the ESC and is aimed at keeping the vehicle at a constant speed during a descent, operating autonomously on the brakes in various ways at the same time. In this way the vehicle stability and completely safe driving are guaranteed, 81 SAFETY above all in poor grip conditions and/or steep descents. To activate the system, reach a speed slower than 25 km/h and press the corresponding button (A)fig. 104; the LED on the button turns on and the display shows a dedicated message. When this function is active the brake lights turn on automatically. While the HDC system is operating it is also possible to take control of the vehicle again by pressing the brake and accelerator pedals. If the function is not made available when the button is pressed, this could be due to brake overheating. In this case, wait a few minutes before using the function again. WARNING The system is available for speeds below 25 km/h. 104 F1A0300 After reaching the desired speed, release the accelerator and brake pedals completely (the LED on the button flashes). If you want to increase/decrease the speed, press the accelerator/brake pedals again. WARNING Do not use the device with the gearbox in neutral position. WARNING It is important to engage a gear suitable for the set speed, to prevent the engine from stalling. 82 WARNING On exceeding 25 km/h, the HDC system is disabled and remains ready to operate again (the LED on the button remains on) when the vehicle returns below 25 km/h. If the vehicle speed exceeds 50 km/h, the HDC system turns off completely (the LED on the button turns off) and any autonomous action on the brakes is disabled.To reactivate it, press the dedicated button again when the speed is again below 25 km/h. 12) WARNING 59) The ESC system cannot overrule the natural laws of physics, and can’t increase the grip available according to the condition of the road. 60) The ESC system cannot prevent accidents, including those due to excessive speed on corners, driving on low-grip surfaces or aquaplaning. 61) The capability of the ESC system must never be tested irresponsibly and dangerously, in such a way as to compromise personal safety and the safety of others. 62) For the correct operation of the ESC and ASR systems it is vital that the tyres are the same make and the same type on all the wheels, in perfect condition and, above all, the recommended type and size. 63) The performance of the ESC and ASR systems must not encourage the driver to take unnecessary risks. Driving style must always be suitable for road conditions, visibility and traffic. The driver is, in any case, responsible for safe driving. 64) The HBA system cannot increase tyre grip on the road over the limits imposed by laws of physics: always drive carefully according to the conditions of the road surface. 65) The HBA system cannot prevent accidents, including those due to excessive speed on bends, travelling on low-grip surfaces or aquaplaning. 66) The HBA system is an aid for the driver, who must always pay full attention while driving. The responsibility always rests with the driver. The features of the HBA system must never be tested in imprudent or dangerous ways, with the possibility of putting the safety of the driver, occupants or other road users at risk. 67) The performance of a vehicle with ERM must never be tested in imprudent or dangerous ways, with the possibility of putting the safety of the driver or other people at risk. IMPORTANT 12) Prolonged use of the system may overheat the braking system. If the brakes overheat, the HDC system, when active, will be gradually deactivated after suitably informing the driver (the LED on the button turns off): it can be reactivated only when the brakes have cooled sufficiently. The distance you can travel depends on the brake temperature and thus on the slope, the load and the vehicle speed. TRACTION PLUS SYSTEM (for versions/markets, where provided) Traction Plus is a driving aid, useful for setting off in poor grip conditions on non-homogeneous road surfaces (snow/asphalt, ice/asphalt, mud/asphalt, etc.), which allows the drive force to be distributed adequately on the engine axle when one of the two drive wheels slips. Traction Plus acts by braking the wheel with poor grip (or the one which slips more than the others), thereby transferring the drive force to those which have greater grip on the ground. This function can be turned on manually by pressing the (A) button fig. 105 on the dashboard and works below a level of 50 km/h. Over this speed, it is automatically deactivated (the LED on the button is still on) and it is reactivated again when the speed is below 50 km/h. 68) 69) 105 F1A0325 Traction Plus operation When the engine is started the system is disabled. To activate the "Traction Plus" system, press the button (A) fig. 105: the LED on the button switches on. The activation of the Traction Plus system involves the following functions being switched on: inhibition of the ASR function, in order to fully exploit the engine torque; the differential locking effect on the front axle, through the braking system, to improve traction on irregular grounds. If the "Traction Plus" system is faulty, the "general failure" instrument panel warning light comes on steady. When travelling on snowy roads with snow chains, it may be helpful to turn the Traction Plus on and thus inhibiting the ASR function: in fact, in these conditions, slipping of the drive wheels 83 SAFETY when moving off makes it possible to obtain better traction. WARNING 68) The Traction Plus system acts effectively only on road surfaces that are not homogeneous and/or differentiated between the two drive wheels. 69) Until the setting off manoeuvre is terminated, fully depress the accelerator pedal in order to transfer all the drive torque to the wheel with the best grip. DRIVING ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS The vehicle may be fitted with the following driving assistance systems: BSA (Blind Spot Assist with Trailer Detection) TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) LDW (Lane Departure Warning) For the operation of the systems, refer to the following pages. BSA (Blind Spot Assist with Trailer Detection) SYSTEM The vehicle can be equipped with the BSA (Blind Spot Assist with Trailer Detection) system for blind spot 84 monitoring. The BSA system uses two radar sensors, located in the rear side bumper (one on each side) fig. 106, to detect the presence of vehicles (cars, trucks, etc.) in blind spots in the rear side zone of the vehicle, while driving on the road and while reversing (RCP functionality). 106 F1A0480 The system warns the driver about the presence of vehicles in the detection area by lighting up, on the relevant side, the warning light located on the door mirror, along with an acoustic warning. When the vehicle is started the warning light turns on to signal the driver that the system is active. Sensors The sensors are activated when any forward gear is engaged at a speed higher than about 10 km/h, or when reverse is engaged. The sensors are temporarily deactivated with vehicle at a standstill and the gear lever in position P (Park) (versions with automatic transmission), or with vehicle at a standstill and parking brake engaged (versions with manual transmission). In no trailers are connected, the detection area of the system covers about a lane on both sides of the vehicle (approx. 3 metres). Such zone begins near the centre pillar of the vehicle and extends up to 6 metres from the rear of the vehicle. When the sensors are active the system monitors the detection areas on both sides of the vehicle and warns the driver about the possible presence of cars in these areas. While driving the system monitors the detection area from three different input points (side, rear and front) to check whether a signal needs to be sent to the driver. IMPORTANT NOTES The system does not signal the presence of fixed object (e.g. safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.). However, in some circumstances, the system may activate in the presence of these objects. This is normal and does not indicate a system malfunction. The system does not warn the driver about the presence of vehicles coming from the opposite direction, in the adjacent lanes. For the system to operate correctly, the side rear bumper area fig. 106 where the radar sensors are located must stay free from snow, ice and dirt gathered from the road surface. Do not cover the side rear bumper area fig. 106 where the radar sensors are located with any object (e.g. adhesives, bike rack, etc.). Rear view The system detects vehicles coming from the rear part of the vehicle on both sides and entering the rear detection area fig. 107 with a difference in speed of less than 50 km/h with respect to your vehicle. 107 F1A0482 Overtaking vehicles If another vehicle is overtaken slowly fig. 108 (with a difference in speed of less than about 25 km/h), the warning light on the door mirror of the corresponding side lights up. If the difference in speed between the two vehicles is greater than about 25 km/h, the warning light does not light up. 109 108 F1A0481 RCP (Rear Cross Path detection) function This system helps the driver during reverse manoeuvres. The RCP system detects objects moving towards both rear sides of the vehicle at a speed of between 1 km/h and 35 km/h, as is generally the case in parking lots fig. 109. F1A0484 The system activation is signalled to the driver by means of a visual and acoustic warning. WARNING If the detection field of sensors are covered by objects or vehicles, the system will not warn the driver. BSA operation method The system can be activated/deactivated by operating on the display Menu, or via the Uconnect™ system (for further information see the dedicated supplement). To turn the system on/off using the display menu, access the Setup Menu by pressing the MODE button on the dashboard and scroll through the list of settings using the or 85 SAFETY 86 buttons. Select "Blind Spot". The available methods are: OFF; DISPLAY; SOUND & DISPLAY; Blind Spot Assist "Display" mode When this mode is active, the BSA system sends a visual warning to the respective door mirror on the side of the detected obstacle. However, when the RCP function is on, the system produces acoustic and visual warnings when an object is detected. When an acoustic warning is sent, the volume of the radio is lowered. Blind Spot Assist "Sound & Display" mode When this mode is active, the BSA system sends a visual warning to the respective door mirror on the side of the detected object. If the direction indicator on the side where an obstacle has been detected is activated, an acoustic warning is emitted as well. The volume of the radio is not turned down. During "RCP" operating mode, the system emits acoustic and visual indications if the presence of an object is detected. When an acoustic warning is sent the volume of the radio is also turned down. "Blind Spot Assist" system deactivation When the system is deactivated ("Blind Spot" function set to "OFF" on the instrument panel), the BSA or RCP systems will not emit either acoustic nor visual warnings. The BSA system will store the operating mode running when the engine was stopped. Each time the engine is started, the operating mode stored previously will be recalled and used. 70) Trailer Detection The system can detect the presence and length of a trailer and extend the blind spot warning zone to the length of the trailer. After the system detects the presence of a trailer and the speed exceeds 10 km/h, a notification is sent to the driver. If a trailer is detected, the Rear Cross Path function is deactivated. The "Blind Spot" function on the display Setup Menu can be used to set the mode for detecting the trailer length. According to the set trailer length detection mode, the corresponding icon will be displayed: with the "Max" setting selected. The warning zone is set to the maximum expected length (greater than 9 metres); , or with the "Auto" setting selected. The system will show an icon corresponding to the automatically detected length (3 m, 6 m, 9 m). In this case, it may be necessary to travel at least a curve with a 90-degree rotation to let the system detect the length of the trailer. Once the length has been determined, the icon corresponding to the length measured in metres or feet will be displayed depending on the selected unit of measurement. If the trailer is longer than 9 m, the system will display the maximum length icon and respective message. If the vehicle is stationary for more than 120 seconds, the system detects the trailer again: if the trailer is no longer detected, the icon indicating the presence and length of the trailer disappears; when set to "Auto", if a new trailer is detected as present, with the same length as the previous one (with an error of 1 m), the length icon remains unchanged; When set to "Auto", if a new trailer is detected as present, with a different length from the previous one, the length icon is updated. WARNING 70) The system is an aid for driving the vehicle, it DOES NOT warn the driver about incoming vehicles outside of the detection areas. The driver must always maintain a sufficient level of attention to the traffic and road conditions and for controlling the trajectory of the vehicle. TPMS (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System) (for versions/markets, where provided) 71) 72) 73) 74) 75) 76) 77) 78) 79) DESCRIPTION The tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS) warns the driver of low tyre pressure on the basis of the cold inflation pressure prescribed for the vehicle. Changes in outside temperature may cause tyre pressure to vary. This means that a decrease in the outside temperature corresponds to a decrease in the tyre pressure. Tyre pressure must always be adjusted according to the cold inflation pressure. Cold tyre inflation pressure is the tyre pressure after letting the vehicle stand for at least three hours or a travel shorter than 1.6 km after an interval of three hours. The cold tyre inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure value printed on the side of the tyre. The tyre pressure also increases while driving the vehicle: this is a normal condition and does not require any adjustment of the pressure. The TPMS continues to advise the driver of the low tyre pressure condition until this is corrected; the warning continues until the pressure corresponds or exceeds the pressure prescribed for the cold tyres. When the low tyre pressure check warning light turns on continuously, the inflation pressure must be adjusted until it reaches the pressure prescribed for cold tyres. After the automatic update of the system, the tyre pressure control warning light switches off. You may need to drive the vehicle for about 20 minutes at a speed higher than 20 km/h to allow the TPMS to receive this information. NOTE The TPMS does not replace the normal tyre maintenance service and does not indicate any fault in a tyre. Therefore, the TPMS should not be used as pressure switch while adjusting the tyre inflation pressure. Driving with insufficient tyre pressure causes their overheating and can result in tyre failure. The low inflation pressure reduces fuel efficiency and tyre tread life and may also affect handling and braking performance of the vehicle. The TPMS does not replace the correct tyre maintenance. It is up to the driver to maintain the correct tyre pressure level measuring it with a suitable pressure switch. This is necessary even if the decrease in the inflation pressure value does not cause the tyre pressure control warning light to switch on. The TPMS warns the driver of any condition of insufficient tyre pressure. If this drops below the insufficient pressure limit for any reason including low temperature and normal pressure loss of the tyre. The seasonal temperature changes affect tyre pressure. The TPMS uses wireless devices with electronic sensors mounted on the wheel rims to constantly monitor the value of tyre pressure. The sensors mounted on each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit various information of the tyres to the receiver module, in order to calculate the pressure. 87 SAFETY WARNING Monitoring and maintaining the correct pressure in all four tyres are particularly important. Tyre pressure monitoring system low pressure warnings The system warns the driver if one or more tyres are flat by turning on the warning light on the instrument panel (together with a warning message and an acoustic signal). In this case, stop the vehicle as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tyre and inflate to the cold tyre pressure value prescribed for the vehicle. The system will automatically update and after receiving the tyre pressure update the tyre pressure control warning light switches off. You may need to drive the vehicle for about 20 minutes at a speed higher than 20 km/h to allow the system to receive this information. TPMS operation faults The system fault is indicated by the corresponding warning light , which first flashes for 75 seconds and then stays on continuously. This can occur in any of the following situations: interference caused by electronic devices or radio frequency emissions similar to those of the TPMS sensors. 88 Application of tinted films which interfere with the signals of the radio waves. Presence of snow or ice on the wheels or the wheel arches. Use of snow chains. Use of wheels/tyres not equipped with TPMS sensors. The spare wheel is not equipped with the tyre pressure control sensor. Therefore, the tyre pressure is not controlled by the system. If the spare wheel replaces a tyre with a pressure lower than the insufficient pressure limit, an acoustic signal will be emitted and the warning light will turn on at the next start-up. When the original tyres is repaired or replaced and it is mounted back on the vehicle to replace the spare wheel, the TPMS will update automatically and the warning light will switch off, provided that the pressure of none of the four tyres is below the insufficient pressure limit. You may need to drive the vehicle for about 20 minutes at a speed higher than 20 km/h to allow the TPMS to receive this information. WARNING 71) The TPMS is optimised for the original tyres and wheels provided. TPMS pressures and alerts have been defined according to the size of the tyres mounted on the vehicle. Using equipment with different size, type or kind may cause irregular system operation or sensor damage. Non-original spare wheels can damage the sensor. Do not use tyre sealant or balancing weights if the vehicle is equipped with TPMS as these may damage the sensors. 72) If the system signals a pressure drop on a specific tyre, it is recommended to check the pressure on all four tyres. 73) The TPMS does not relieve the driver from the obligation to check the tyre pressure every month; it is not even to be considered a replacing system for maintenance or a safety system. 74) Tyre pressure must be checked with tyres cold. Should it become necessary for whatever reason to check pressure with warm tyres, do not reduce pressure even though it is higher than the prescribed value, but repeat the check when tyres are cold. 75) The TPMS cannot indicate sudden tyre pressure drops (for example when a tyre bursts). In this case, stop the vehicle, braking with caution and avoiding abrupt steering. 76) The system only warns that the tyre pressure is low: it is not able to inflate them. 77) Insufficient tyre inflation increases fuel consumption, reduces the tread duration and may affect your ability to drive the vehicle safely. 78) Always refit the valve stem cap after inspecting or adjusting tyre pressure. This prevents dampness or dirt from entering the valve stem and thus the pressure control sensor from being damaged. 79) The tyre repair kit (Fix&Go) provided with the vehicle (for versions/markets, where provided) is compatible with the TPMS sensors; using sealants not equivalent with that in the original kit may adversely affect its operation. If sealants not equivalent with the original one are used, it is recommended to have the TPMS sensor operation checked by a qualified repair centre. is advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership should the windscreen need to be replaced.If the repair is carried out at a specialist window replacement centre, it is still necessary to go to a Fiat Dealership to have the camera calibrated. OPERATION The system is always active when the vehicle is started. It can be deactivated or re-activated by pressing the button (A) fig. 110 on the dashboard (see following description). LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (DRIVING ADVISOR) (lane crossing warning) (for versions/markets, where provided) 80) 81) 82) The Lane Departure Warning (Driving Advisor) is a warning system that notifies the driver if he/she crosses the lane if distracted. A video sensor, fitted on the windscreen near the interior rear view mirror, detects the lane demarcation lines and the position of the vehicle in relation to them. WARNING On cars with Lane Departure Warning (Driving Advisor), it 110 F1A0322 The LED on the button switches on to confirm that the system has been activated and a dedicated message appears on the display. When the system is activated, the LED on the dedicated button is off. If the user deactivates the system, the LED on the button switches on constantly and a dedicated message appears on the display to confirm that the system has been switched off. The system is enabled at every key cycle of the vehicle and starts recognition of the operating conditions (condition signalled to the driver when the 2 direction warning lights and on the instrument panel light up). When the system recognises the operating conditions, it becomes active, i.e. it can assist the driver with visual and acoustic warnings. Therefore the two direction warning lights and on the instrument panel switch off to prevent excessively frequent warnings while driving in towns or on winding roads at low speeds. WARNING If the operating conditions are no longer present, the system remains activated but inactive. Therefore the driver is warned by constant illumination of the 2 direction indicator lights and on the instrument panel. OPERATING CONDITIONS FOR ACTIVATION Once switched on, the system becomes active only if the following 89 SAFETY conditions are met: front driving direction (reverse not engaged); the system does not detect any error; calibration in progress; vehicle speed between 60 km/h and the max. vehicle speed; presence of lane demarcation lines not deteriorated and visible on both sides; suitable visibility conditions; straight line or wide radius bends; sufficient field of vision condition (safety distance from vehicle in front); direction indicators not activated in the lane exiting direction (e.g. right lane exiting direction, right direction indicator activated); vehicle direction getting constantly closer to the lane demarcation lines (the vehicle trajectory is within the lane demarcation lines); vehicle not constantly next to the lane demarcation line. radio navigation system) along with the corresponding direction warning light ( or ) lighting up. If the driver turns on the direction indicator in order to change lanes or for overtaking, then the system will switch off the driver warning. If the driver keeps deliberately with the lane change manoeuvre, the system interrupts the warning, remaining enabled if the operating conditions are not satisfied or active if the operating conditions are exceeded (see the dedicated paragraph). ACTIVATING/ DEACTIVATING THE SYSTEM Automatic mode If the Start&Stop is active the system deactivates automatically. The system will reactivate and check its operating conditions again after the vehicle has been started. When the system is active, if the vehicle gets close to one of the limit lines or one of the two lane demarcation lines, the driver is warned with an acoustic signal (coming from the crossed line side if the vehicle is equipped with the 90 SWITCHING OFF THE SYSTEM Manual mode The system can be switched off by pressing button (A) fig. 110 on the dashboard. The LED on the button switches on and a message appears on the display to confirm that the system has been switched off. SYSTEM FAILURE In the event of malfunction, the system signals the fault to the driver with a message on the display, an acoustic warning and by turning on the icon on the display (for versions/markets, where provided). WARNINGS The Driving Advisor cannot operate due to a not perfectly balanced and excessive load. The operation of the system can be adversely affected in some cases by the morphology of the territory/road being driven on (e.g. driving over humps), poor visibility conditions (e.g. fog, rain, snow), extreme light conditions (e.g. glare of the sun, darkness), lack of cleanliness or damage, even partial, to the windscreen in the area in front of the camera. The Driving Advisor cannot operate following a malfunction of the following safety systems: ABS, ESC, ASR and Traction Plus. The operation of the system can be adversely affected by poor visibility conditions (e.g. fog, rain, snow), extreme light conditions (glare of the sun, darkness), lack of cleaning or damage, even partial, to the windscreen in the area in front the camera. The area of the windscreen by the camera must not be partly or totally obscured by objects (e.g. stickers, protective film, etc.). WARNING 80) If the camera loses its position due to a load variation, the system may not work temporarily to allow the camera to perform an auto-calibration. 81) The Driving Advisor is not an automatic driving system and does not replace the driver in controlling the trajectory of the vehicle. The driver is personally responsible for maintaining sufficient attention for the traffic and road conditions and for controlling the vehicle trajectory safely. 82) In the case of indistinct, overlapping or missing lane demarcation lines, the system may not assist the driver: in this case the Lane Departure Warning (Driving Advisor) will be inactive. 91 SAFETY TABLE SUMMARISING SIGNALS DURING THE USE OF THE LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (DRIVING ADVISOR) Status of the LED on the button Off Message in the display Status of the symbol on the display Acoustic warning Meaning – – – system active (automatic for each key cycle) – system active without operating conditions met – system active and operating conditions met: the system can provide acoustic-visual warnings Yes the system is active and recognises the operating conditions: it warns about deviation from the left line Yes the system is active and recognises the operating conditions: it warns about deviation from the right line no The system has been switched off manually Yes The system is faulty: go to a Fiat Dealership warning lights Off Driving Advisor active and on fixed Off Driving Advisor active Off – – warning light Blinking Off – warning light Blinking 92 On Driving Advisor off – On Driving Advisor not available - see handbook failure warning Status of the LED on the button Message in the display On Driving Advisor not available - clean the front camera Status of the symbol on the display failure warning Acoustic warning Meaning Yes system failure: clean the windscreen 93 SAFETY OCCUPANT PROTECTION SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety equipment of the vehicle comprises the following protection systems: seat belts; SBR (Seat Belt Reminder) system; head restraints; child restraint systems; Front airbags and side bags. Read the information given the following pages with the utmost care. It is of fundamental importance that the protection systems are used in the correct way to guarantee the maximum possible safety level for the driver and the passengers. For the description of the head restraint adjustment see the "Head restraints" paragraph in the "Knowing your vehicle" chapter. SEAT BELTS IN BRIEF All the seats in the vehicle are equipped with seat belts with three anchoring points and a retractor. The reel mechanism operates locking the belt in the event of sharp braking or strong deceleration due to an impact. This allows the belt strap to slide freely and to adapt to the body of the occupant. In the event of an accident, the belt will lock to reduce the risk of impact inside the passenger compartment or of being projected outside the vehicle. The driver is responsible for respecting, and ensuring that all the other occupants of the vehicle also respect, the local laws in force in relation to the use of the seat belts. Always fasten the seat belts before setting off. USING THE SEAT BELTS The belt should be worn keeping the torso straight and rested against the backrest. To fasten the seat belts, hold fastening tongue (A) fig. 111 and insert it into buckle (B), until it clicks into place. 94 111 F1A0145 On removal, if the belt jams, let it rewind for a short stretch, then pull it out again without jerking. Press button (C) fig. 111 to release the belt. Guide the belt while it is rewinding to prevent it from twisting. The retractor may lock up when the vehicle is parked on a steep slope: this is perfectly normal. Furthermore, the reel mechanism locks the belt if it is pulled sharply or in the event of sudden braking, collisions and high-speed bends. 83) HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT (For versions/markets, where provided) To adjust, press button (A) fig. 112 and raise or lower the handle (B). 84) 85) Always adjust the seat belt height to the passenger's body. This precaution may considerably reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. Correct adjustment is obtained when the belt passes approximately half way between the shoulder and the neck. WARNING 83) Never press button (C) when travelling. 84) The height of the seat belts must be adjusted with the vehicle stationary. 85) After adjustment, always check that the cursor to which the ring is fastened is locked in one of the preset positions. To do this, with button released, press downward more to allow the anchoring device to click if it has not been released in one of the possible positions. SBR SYSTEM 112 F1A0146 Seat belt with retractor for front central place on bench seat The two-seater front bench is equipped with an on-board seat belt (reel on seat) with three anchorage points for the central position fig. 113. IN BRIEF The vehicle is provided with a system called SBR (Seat Belt Reminder), composed of a buzzer which, along with the flashing warning light on the instrument panel, warns the driver that their seat belt or (for versions/markets, where provided) the passenger's seat belt is not correctly fastened. PRE-TENSIONERS To increase the protective efficiency of the front seat belts, the vehicle is fitted with pretensioners. These devices, in the event of a head-on crash or side impact, rewind the seat belts a few centimetres. In this way, they ensure that the belts fit tightly to the wearer before the restraining action begins. It is evident that the pretensioners have been activated when the belt withdraws toward the retractor. A slight discharge of smoke may be produced during the activation of the pretensioner which is not harmful and does not involve any fire hazard. The pretensioner does not require any maintenance or lubrication. Any changes to its original conditions will invalidate its efficiency. If, due to unusual natural events (floods, sea storms, etc.), the device has been affected by water or mud, contact a Fiat Dealership to have it replaced. 86) 13) For permanent deactivation, contact a Fiat Dealership. With multifunction display, the SBR system can also be reactivated through the Setup menu. 113 WARNING To obtain the highest degree of protection from the action of the pretensioner, wear the seat belt tight to the chest and pelvis. F1A0147 95 SAFETY LOAD LIMITERS To increase passenger safety, the front seat belt retractors contain a load limiter which controls the force acting on the chest and shoulders during the belt restraining action in the event of a head-on collision. This device is present on all versions with the exception of the version with bench seat if no air bag is present. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR USING THE SEAT BELTS Seat belts are also to be worn by pregnant women: the risk of injury in the case of accident is greatly reduced for them and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. Pregnant women must position the lower part of the belt very low down so that it passes over the pelvis and under the abdomen (see fig. 114). While pregnancy progresses, the driver must adjust both the seat and the steering wheel to ensure full control of the vehicle (pedals and steering wheel must be easily accessible). The maximum clearance should be kept between the abdomen and the steering wheel. The seat belt strap must not be twisted. The upper part must pass over the shoulder and cross the chest diagonally. The lower part must adhere to the pelvis fig. 115, not to the 96 abdomen of the occupant. Do not use devices (clips, etc.) to hold the seat belt away from your body. 87) 88) 89) 116 114 115 F1A0148 F1A0149 F1A0150 Each seat belt must be used by only one person. Never travel with a child sitting on the passenger's lap and a single belt to protect them both fig. 116. In general, do not place any objects between the person and the belt. SEAT BELTS MAINTENANCE For keeping the seat belts in efficient conditions, carefully observe the following warnings: always use the seat belt well stretched and never twisted; make sure that it is free to run without obstructions; check seat belt operation as follows: attach the seat belt and pull it hard; replace the belt after an accident of a certain severity even if it does not appear to be damaged. Always replace the belt if the pretensioners were deployed; prevent the retractors from getting wet: their correct operation is only guaranteed if water does not get inside; replace the seat belt when it shows wear or cuts. WARNING 86) The pretensioner may be used only once. After it is triggered, have it replaced at a Fiat Dealership. 87) For maximum safety, keep the backrest upright, lean back into it and make sure the seat belt fits closely across your chest and pelvis. Always fasten the seat belts on both the front and the rear seats! Travelling without wearing seat belts will increase the risk of serious injury and even death in the event of an accident. 88) Removing or tampering with seat belt and pretensioner components is strictly prohibited. Any intervention on these components must be performed by qualified and authorised technicians. Always go to a Fiat Dealership. 89) If the belt has been sharply pulled, for example as the result of an accident, the seat belt, together with the anchoring devices, the anchoring device fixing screws and the pretensioner must be completely replaced. Even if the belt does not present any exterior signs of wear or damage, it may have lost its restraining properties. IMPORTANT 13) Operations which lead to impacts, vibrations or localised heating (over 100°C for a maximum of six hours) in the area around the pretensioners may damage or deploy them. Contact a Fiat Dealership should intervention be necessary on these components. CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY For optimal protection in the event of an impact, all occupants must be seated and wearing adequate restraint systems, including newborn and other children! This prescription is compulsory in all EC countries according to EC Directive 2003/20/EC. Children below the height of 1.50 metres and up to 12 years must be protected with suitable restraint systems and be seated on the rear seats. Statistics on accidents indicate that the rear seats offer greater safety for children. Compared with adults, a child's head is proportionally larger and heavier than the rest of the body, while muscles and bone structure are not fully developed. Therefore, correct restraint systems other than adult seat belts are necessary, to reduce as much as possible the risk of injuries in the event of an accident, braking or sudden manoeuvre. Children must be seated safely and comfortably. As far as the characteristics of the child seats used allow, you are advised to keep children in rear facing child seats for as long as possible (at least until 3–4 years old), since this is the most protected position in the event of an impact. The choice of the most suitable child restraint system depends on the weight and size of the child. There are various types of child restraint systems that can be secured to the vehicle by means of the seat belts or with the ISOFIX anchorages. It is recommended to always choose the restraint system most suitable for the child; for this reason always refer to the Owner Handbook provided with the child restraint system, to be sure that it is of the right type for the children it is intended for. In Europe the characteristics of child restraint systems are ruled by the regulation ECE-R44, dividing them into five weight groups: Group Weight groups Group 0 up to 10 kg in weight Group 0+ up to 13 kg in weight 97 SAFETY Group Weight groups Group 1 9-18 kg Group 2 15 - 25 kg Group 3 22 - 36 kg As you can see, the groups overlap partly and, in fact, there are devices on sale that cover more than one weight group. All restraint devices must bear the typeapproval data, together with the control mark, on a label solidly fixed to the child restraint system which must never be removed. Over 1.50 m in height, from the point of view of restraint systems, children are considered as adults and wear the seat belts normally. Lineaccessori MOPAR includes child restraint systems for each weight group. These devices are recommended, having been specifically designed for Fiat cars. fig. 117 and it must restrain the child in turn with its own belts. 91) 92) 93) 94) 95) 96) 97) 92) 93) 94) 95) 96) 117 F1A0151 GROUP 1 Children from 9 kg to 18 kg in weight can be carried facing forwards if the child seat is fitted with a front cushion, through which the vehicle seat belt restrains both child and seat fig. 118. 92) 93) 94) 95) 96) 97) 119 98 F1A0153 GROUP 3 For children from 22 kg to 36 kg in weight the size of the child's chest no longer requires a support to space the child's back from the backrest. The fig. 120 shows the correct child positioning on the rear seat. 90) GROUPS 0 and 0+ Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facing backwards on a cradle seat, which, supporting the head, does not induce stress on the neck in the event of sharp decelerations. The cradle is restrained by the seat belts of the vehicle, as shown in GROUP 2 Children from 15 to 25 kg may use the seat belts of the vehicle directly fig. 119. The child restraint system is now needed only to position the child correctly with respect to the belts so that the diagonal section crosses the child's chest and never the neck, and the lower part is snug on the pelvis not the abdomen. 118 92) 93) 94) 95) 96) F1A0152 120 F1A0154 Children over 1.50 m in height can wear seat belts like adults. WARNING 90) Do not place a rear-facing cradle seat on the front seat if the passenger side airbag is enabled. Deployment of the airbag in an accident could cause fatal injuries to the child regardless of the severity of the impact. It is advisable to always carry children in a child restraint system on the rear seat, which is the most protected position in the event of a collision. If you need to carry a child on the front passenger seat in a rear-facing cradle restraint system, the passenger side airbags (front and side bags for chest/pelvis protection, for versions/markets, where provided) must be deactivated using the setup menu. It is important to check the dedicated LED on the dashboard to make on button sure that they are actually deactivated. Move the passenger's seat as far back as possible to avoid contact between the child seat and the dashboard. 91) On the sun visor there is a label with suitable symbols reminding the user that it is compulsory to deactivate the airbag if a rearward facing child restraint system is fitted. Always comply with the instructions on the passenger side sun visor (see the "Supplementary Restraint System (SRS) Airbag" paragraph). 92) Do not move the front or rear seat if a child is seated on it or on the dedicated child restraint system. 93) Incorrect fitting of the child restraint system may result in an inefficient protection system. In the event of an accident the child restraint system may become loose and the child may be injured, even fatally. When fitting a restraint system for newborns or children, strictly comply with the instructions provided by the Manufacturer. 94) When the child restraint system is not used, secure it with the seat belt or with the ISOFIX anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it unsecured inside the passenger compartment. In this way, in the event of sudden braking or an accident, it will not cause injuries to the occupants. 95) Always make sure that the diagonal section of the seat belt does not pass under the arms or behind the back of the child. In the event of an accident the seat belt will not be able to secure the child, with the risk of injury, including fatal injury. Therefore the child must always wear the seat belt correctly. 96) The diagrams are indicative and provided for assembly purposes only. Fit the child restraint system according to the instructions, which must be included. 97) Car seats for weight groups 0 and 1 feature an anchor in front of the vehicle safety belts as well as its own belts to restrain the child. Due to their weight, they may be dangerous if incorrectly mounted (e.g. if fastened to the vehicle seat belts placing a cushion in between). Follow the assembly instructions carefully. 99 SAFETY PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE FOR USING UNIVERSAL CHILD SEATS The vehicle complies with the new European Directive 2000/3/EC which governs the arrangement possibilities for child restraint systems on the seats of a vehicle as shown in the following table (the table refers to the Van, Combi and Panorama versions): Group Weight groups CAB 1st and 2nd REAR SEATS ROW Single or two-seater seat (1 or 2 passengers) (*) Rear left side passenger Rear right side passenger Central passenger Airbag enabled Airbag disabled Up to 13 kg X U U U U Group 1 9 - 18 kg X U U U U Group 2 15 - 25 kg U U U U U Group 3 22–36 kg U U U U U Group 0, 0+ X restraint system not suitable for children in this weight category. U suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category, according to European Standard ECE-R44 for the specified "Groups". * IMPORTANT: NEVER fit rearward-facing child restraint systems on the front seat with an active passenger airbag. If you wish to fit a rearward-facing child seat in the front passenger seat, first deactivate the respective airbag (see instructions in the paragraph Supplementary protection system (SRS) – Airbag"). 100 SETUP FOR “UNIVERSAL ISOFIX" CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM The vehicle is set up for fitting an ISOFIX child restraint system. The ISOFIX system lets you install the ISOFIX child restraining system quickly, simply and safely, without using the vehicle seat belts, but by connecting the child restrain system directly to the vehicle seat with three anchors in the vehicle. Traditional child restraint systems can be fitted alongside ISOFIX child restraint systems on different seats in the same vehicle. To install an ISOFIX child restraint system, attach it to the two metal anchorings (A) fig. 121 located where the rear seat cushion meets the backrest, then fix the upper strap (available together with the restraint system) to the dedicated anchoring (B) fig. 122 located at the bottom behind the backrest. fig. 124 shows an example of a Universal ISOFIX child restraint system for weight group 1. 121 F1A0156 123 F1B0117C 122 F1A0157 124 F1A0155 WARNING When a Universal ISOFIX child restraint system is used, only ECE R44 "ISOFIX Universal" (R44/03 or further upgrades) type-approved child restraint systems can be used fig. 123. WARNING The fig. 124 is indicative and for assembly purposes only. Fit the child restraint system according to the instructions, which must be included. WARNING 98) Fit the child restraint system only when the vehicle is stationary. The child restraint system is correctly fixed to the brackets when you hear the click. Follow the instructions for assembly, disassembly and positioning that the Manufacturer must supply with the child restraint system. 98) 99) 100) 101) 101 SAFETY 102 99) Fiat Professional recommends fitting the child restraint system according to the instructions, which must be included. 100) Do not use the same lower anchoring to install more than one child restraint system. 101) If a Universal ISOFIX child restraint system is not fixed to all three anchorages, it will not be able to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be seriously or fatally injured. SUITABILITY OF PASSENGER SEATS FOR USE WITH ISOFIX CHILD SEATS The table below shows the different installation possibilities for "Universal Isofix" child restraint systems on the seats fitted with ISOFIX attachments, in accordance with European regulation ECE 16. Weight group Portable cradle Group 0 (up to 10 kg) Group 0+ (up to 13 kg) Group 1 (from 9 up to 18 kg) Child restraint system position Isofix size class Rear side ISOFIX position, 1st row (PANORAMA) Rear side ISOFIX position, 1st row (COMBI) Rear facing F X X Rear facing G X X Rear facing E IL IL Rear facing E IL IL Rear facing D IL IL Rear facing C IL IL Rear facing D IL IL Rear facing C IL IL Forward facing B IUF IUF Forward facing B1 IUF IUF Forward facing A IUF IUF X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this group of weight and/or size class. IL: suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems of the "Specific for the vehicle", "Restricted", or "Semiuniversal" categories, approved for this type of vehicle. IUF: suitable for forward facing ISOFIX child restraint systems of the universal category, approved for use in the weight group. WARNING The bench seat and the Crew Cab Van version 4-seater seat are not suitable for positioning a child restraint system. 103 SAFETY 104 NOTE: The other weight groups are covered by specific ISOFIX child restraint systems, which can only be used if specifically tested for this vehicle (see list of vehicles provided with the child restraint system). i-Size CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS These child restraint systems, built and type-approved according to the i-Size (ECE R129) standard, ensure better safety conditions to carry children on board a vehicle: the child must be transported rearward facing until 15 months; child restraint system protection is increased in the event of a side collision; the use of the ISOFIX system is promoted to avoid faulty installation of the child restraint system; efficiency in the choice of the child restraint system, which isn't made according to weight any more but according to the child's height, is increased; compatibility between the vehicle seats and the child restraint systems is better: the i-Size child restraint systems can be considered as "Super ISOFIX"; this means that they can be perfectly fitted in type-approved i-Size seats, but can also be fitted in ISOFIX (ECE R44) type-approved seats. 125 J0A0450 WARNING See the table shown on the following page to check whether your vehicle is approved for installing i-Size child restraint systems. WARNING If your vehicle seats are iSize approved, the fig. 125symbol will appear on the seats near the ISOFIX attachments. 105 SAFETY The following table, according to European standard ECE 129, indicates the possibility of i-Size child restraint system installation. i-Size POSITIONS ON THE VEHICLE i-Size child restraint systems Device Front passenger Rear side passengers Rear central passenger ISO/R2 X X X ISO/F2 X X X X: seat not suitable for Universal i-Size child restraint systems. WARNING This vehicle is not approved for use with i-Size child restraint systems. Despite this, it may be possible to install an "i-Size" child restraint system. Check compatibility of this vehicle with the child restraint system on the manufacturer's Internet website. 106 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS RECOMMENDED BY FIAT PROFESSIONAL FOR YOUR NEW DUCATO In the markets in which they are available, Lineaccessori MOPAR offers a complete range of child restraint systems to be fixed using the seat belt with three anchor points or the ISOFIX anchorages. WARNING FCA recommends fitting the child restraint system according to the instructions, which must be included 102) 103) 104) 105) Weight group Child restraint system Type of child restraint system Child restraint system installation BeSafe iZi Go Modular Fiat order code: 71808564 Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg from 40 cm to 80 cm + + Universal/i-Size child restraint system. It must be installed facing rearwards, using the vehicle seat belts only, or the dedicated i-Size base (which can be purchased separately) and the vehicle ISOFIX anchorages. It must be fitted on the rear outer seats. BeSafe iZi Modular i-Size Base Fiat order code: 71808566 107 SAFETY Weight group Child restraint system Type of child restraint system Child restraint system installation BeSafe iZi Modular i-Size Fiat order code: 71808565 Group 0+/1: from 9 up to 18 kg from 67 cm to 105 cm + + The approved i-Size child restraint system that must be installed in the vehicle together with the underneath iZi Modular i-Size Base, which can be purchased separately. It can be installed facing forwards or facing backwards (refer to the child restraint system manual) It must be fitted on the rear outer seats. BeSafe iZi Modular i-Size Base Fiat order code: 71808566 Group 2: from 15 kg to 25 kg from 95 cm to 135 cm 108 Britax Römer KidFix XP It can only be fitted facing forwards, using the three-point seat belt and the ISOFIX anchorages, if present. FCA recommends installing it using the ISOFIX anchor points of the vehicle. It must be fitted on the rear outer seats. Weight group Group 3: from 22 kg to 36 kg from 136 cm to 150 cm Child restraint system Type of child restraint system Britax Römer KidFix XP Child restraint system installation It can only be fitted facing forwards, using the three-point seat belt and the ISOFIX anchorages, if present. FCA recommends installing it using the ISOFIX anchor points of the vehicle. It must be fitted on the rear outer seats. WARNING 102) Fit the child restraint system only when the vehicle is stationary. The child restraint system is correctly fixed to the brackets when you hear the click. Follow the instructions for assembly, disassembly and positioning that the Manufacturer must supply with the child restraint system. 103) Fiat Professional recommends fitting the child restraint system according to the instructions, which must be included. 104) Do not use the same lower anchoring to install more than one child restraint system. 105) If a Universal ISOFIX child restraint system is not fixed to all three anchorages, it will not be able to protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be seriously or fatally injured. 109 SAFETY 110 Main recommendations to carry children safely The recommended position for installing child restraint systems is on the rear seat, as it is the most protected area in the event of an impact. Keep children in rearward facing child restraint systems for as long as possible, until 3–4 years old if possible. If the passenger front airbag is deactivated, always check the corresponding LED on the button on the instrument panel to make sure that it has actually been deactivated. Carefully follow the instructions that come with the child seat, which the manufacturer must supply. Keep the instructions in the vehicle along with the other papers and this handbook. Do not use second-hand child seats without instructions. Always check that the seat belt is well fastened by pulling on it. Only one child is to be strapped into each restraint system; never carry two children using one child restraint system. Always check that seat belts do not rest on the child’s neck. While travelling, do not let the child sit incorrectly or unfasten the belts. Never carry children on your lap, even newborns. No-one can hold a child in the case of a crash. Never allow a child to put the belt's diagonal section under an arm or behind their back. If the vehicle has been involved in a road accident, replace the child restraint system with a new one. In addition, and depending on the type of child restraint system installed, replace the Isofix anchorages or the seat belt with which the child restraint system was connected. The rear headrest can be removed if needed to install a child restraint system. The head restraint must always be fitted in the vehicle if the seat is used by an adult passenger or a child sitting in a restraint system without backrest. SUPPLEMENTARY RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) - AIRBAG The vehicle may be equipped with: driver front airbag; front passenger airbag; front side bags to protect the pelvis and chest of the driver and passenger; window bags to protect the heads of the front seat occupants. The airbag locations on the vehicle are marked by the word "AIRBAG" in the middle of the steering wheel, on the dashboard, on the side lining or on a label placed next to the airbag deployment area. FRONT AIRBAGS The front airbags protect the front seat occupants in the event of a mediumhigh severity frontal impact, by placing the bag between the occupant and the steering wheel or dashboard. Therefore, non-activation in other types of collisions (side collisions, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) is not a system malfunction. An electronic control unit will make the bag inflate in the event of a frontal impact. The bag will inflate instantaneously placing itself between the front occupants body and the structures which could cause injury. It will deflate immediately afterwards. Front airbags are not a replacement of but complementary to the seat belts, which you are recommended to always wear, as specified by law in Europe and most non-European countries. In the event of an impact, someone not wearing a seat belt could move forward and come into contact with a bag which is still opening. The protection offered by the bag is compromised in these circumstances. Front airbags may not activate in the following situations: frontal impacts against highly deformable objects not involving the front surface of the vehicle (e.g. wing collision against guard rail, etc.); when the vehicle is wedged under other vehicles or protective barriers (e.g. under a lorry or a guardrail); Failure to deploy in the conditions described above is due to the fact that the airbags may not provide any additional protection compared with seat belts, so their activation would be inappropriate. In these cases, non-deployment does not indicate a system malfunction. occupants wearing seat belts. At their maximum inflation, their volume fills most of the space between the steering wheel and the driver and between the dashboard and the passenger. The airbags are not deployed in the event of minor frontal impacts (for which the restraining action of the seat belts is sufficient). Seat belts must always be worn. In the event of a frontal collision, they ensure the correct positioning of the occupant. DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG This consists of an instant-inflating bag contained in a special compartment in the centre of the steering wheel fig. 126. PASSENGER SIDE FRONT AIRBAG (for versions/markets, where provided) This consists of an instantly inflating bag contained in a special recess in the dashboard fig. 127: this bag has a larger volume than that on the driver side. 127 F1A0159 PASSENGER'S FRONT AIRBAG AND CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 107) 126 F1A0312 Rearward facing child restraint systems must NEVER be fitted on the front seat with an active passenger airbag since in the event of an impact the airbag activation may cause fatal injuries to the transported child. 106) The driver's and passenger's front airbags have been designed and calibrated to protect front seat 111 SAFETY protection status. If the LED is off, the passenger side protection is activated. When the front passenger airbag and side bag (for versions/markets, where provided) are activated again, the warning light turns off. 128 F0T0950 ALWAYS comply with the instructions on the label stuck on the passenger side sun visor fig. 128. Manual deactivation of front passenger side airbag and side bag (for versions/markets, where provided) If a child must necessarily be carried on the front seat in a rear-facing child restraint system, the front passenger airbag and side bag (for versions/markets, where provided) can be deactivated. WARNING To manually deactivate the front passenger airbag and side bag (for versions/markets, where provided), refer to the explanations provided in the "Display" paragraph in the "Knowing the instrument panel" chapter. The LED on the button switches on in case of deactivation.The LED that corresponds fig. 129 on the to the symbol dashboard indicates the passenger's 112 The LED is tested also for markets where the passenger protection deactivation is not provided, and the LED switches on for less than one second when the key is turned to MAR, and then switches off again. The warning light may light up with various intensity levels depending on the vehicle conditions. The intensity may also vary during the same key cycle. WARNING 129 F1A0374 When the vehicle is started (key in MAR position), the LED turns on for approx. 8 seconds, provided that at least 5 seconds have elapsed from the previous switching off. If not, contact a Fiat Dealership. If the vehicle is switched off/on again in less than 5 seconds the LED may remain off. In this case, to check correct LED operation, switch the vehicle off, wait at least 5 seconds and switch on again. During the first 8 seconds, the activation of the LED does not actually show the passenger protection status, but only checks its correct operation. 106) Do not apply stickers or other objects to the steering wheel, the dashboard in the passenger side airbag area and the seats. Never put objects (e.g. mobile phones) on the passenger side of the dashboard since they could interfere with correct inflation of the passenger airbag and also cause serious injury to the passengers. 107) When there is an active passenger airbag, DO NOT install rearward facing child restraint systems on the front seat. Deployment of the airbag in a crash could cause fatal injuries to the child regardless of the severity of the collision. Therefore, always deactivate the passenger side airbag when a rearward facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat. The front passenger seat must also be positioned back as far as possible in order to prevent the child restraint system from coming into contact with the dashboard. Immediately reactivate the passenger airbag as soon as the child restraint system has been removed. PASSENGER'S FRONT AIRBAG AND CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS: IMPORTANT 130 F1A0387 113 SAFETY SIDE BAGS 108) 109) 110) 111) 112) 113) 114) 115) 116) 117) 118) 119) 120) 121) To help increase occupant protection in the event of a side impact, for versions/markets where provided, the vehicle is equipped with front side bags and window bags. Side bags (for versions/markets where provided) protect occupants from side impacts of medium-high severity, by placing the bag between the occupant and the internal parts of the side structure of the vehicle. Non-activation of side bags in other types of collisions (front collisions, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) is not a system malfunction. An electronic control unit causes the bags to inflate in the event of a side-on collision. The bags inflate instantaneously, placing themselves between the occupant's body and the structures which could cause injury. They deflate immediately afterwards. Side bags (for versions/markets where provided) are not a replacement of but complementary to the belts, which you are recommended to always wear, as specified by law in Europe and most non-European countries. FRONT SIDE BAGS FOR CHEST PROTECTION (for versions/markets, where provided) Housed in the seat backrests fig. 131, they are composed of an instantly inflating bag, which serves to protect the occupants' chest and pelvis in the event of a medium-high severity side impact. 132 F1A0333 Window bags have been designed for protecting the head of front occupants in the event of side impact, thanks to the wide bag inflation surface. 131 F1A0160 WINDOW BAGS (for versions/markets, where provided) They consist of two curtain bags, one on the right and the other on the left side of the vehicle, located behind the side coverings of the roof and covered by special finishing fig. 132. WARNING In the event of a side-on crash, the system offers best protection if you keep a correct position on the seat because this allows the side bags to inflate correctly. WARNING The front airbags and/or side bags may be deployed if the vehicle is subject to heavy knocks or accidents involving the underbody area, such as for example violent shocks, against steps, kerbs or low obstacles, vehicle falling into big potholes or depressions in the road. WARNING A small amount of dust will be released when the airbags are 114 deployed. The dust is not harmful and does not indicate the beginning of a fire. Furthermore, the surface of the deployed bag and the interior of the vehicle may be covered in a dusty residue: this may irritate your skin and eyes. Wash with mild soap and water in the event of exposure. WARNING Should an accident occur in which any of the safety devices are activated, take the vehicle to a Fiat Dealership to have the activated devices replaced and to have the whole system checked. Every control, repair and replacement operation concerning the airbags must be carried out only at Fiat Dealerships. If you are having the vehicle scrapped, have the system deactivated at a Fiat Dealership first. If the vehicle changes ownership, the new owner must be informed of how to use the airbags and the above warnings and also be given this "Owner Handbook". WARNING Pretensioners, front airbags and front side bags are deployed differently according to the type of collision. Failure to activate one or more of the devices does not indicate a system malfunction. WARNING 108) Never rest head, arms and elbows on the doors, on the windows and in the window bag head protection area to prevent possible injuries during inflation phase. 109) Never lean your head, arms or elbows out of the window. 110) If when turning the key to MAR does not turn on the warning light or if it stays on while driving (together with the message on the multifunction display, for versions/markets, where provided), there could be an anomaly in the safety systems; in this event, airbags or pretensioners may not trigger in the case of an accident or, in a lower number of cases, they could be triggered accidentally. Contact a Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked. 111) Do not cover the backrest of the front or rear seats with covers which are not suitable for use with side bags. 112) Do not travel with objects in your lap, in front of your chest or held in your mouth (e.g., pipe, pencil etc.). They could cause severe injury if the airbag is deployed in a crash. 113) The airbag must be able to inflate without obstruction in the event of deployment. It is therefore recommended not to drive with the body bent forward, but to sit up resting your back and shoulders on the backrest of the seat. Adjusting the position of the seat so that you can reach and manoeuvre the steering wheel comfortably with your arms slightly bent being as far away as possible from the steering wheel. Being too close to the steering wheel when the airbag is deployed may cause serious injury. 114) The airbags may also be deployed when the vehicle is not moving, if the ignition key is inserted and turned to MAR even when the engine is off, if the vehicle is hit by another moving vehicle. Therefore, even if the vehicle is stationary, when an active front passenger airbag is fitted, DO NOT install rear facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat. Deployment of the airbag following an impact could cause fatal injuries to the child. Therefore, always deactivate the passenger side airbag when a rearward facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat. The front passenger seat must also be positioned back as far as possible in order to prevent the child restraint system from coming into contact with the dashboard. Immediately reactivate the passenger airbag as soon as the child restraint system has been removed. Also remember that, if the key is turned to STOP, none of the safety devices (airbags or pretensioners) will be deployed in the event of collision. Non-deployment in such cases does not indicate a system malfunction. 115) Have the airbag system checked by a Fiat Dealership if the vehicle was stolen, if theft was attempted, or if the vehicle was subjected to vandalism or flooding. 116) By turning the ignition key to MAR position, the LED on the button located on the dashboard lights up (the time it stays lit up can vary depending on the market), to check that the button LED is working correctly. 115 SAFETY 116 117) Do not wash the seats with water or pressurised steam (wash by hand or at automatic seat washing stations). 118) The front airbag deployment threshold is higher than that of the pretensioners. For impacts whose intensity falls between the two levels, normally, only the pretensioners will be activated. 119) Do not affix rigid objects to the coat hooks or support handles. 120) The airbag does not replace seat belts but increases their efficiency. Furthermore, since front airbags are not deployed in low-speed frontal impacts, side impacts, rear shunts or roll-overs, the passengers are protected only by the seat belts which must therefore be fastened at all times. 121) In some versions, in case of LED failure OFF (located on the plate of the instrument panel), the light on the console turns on and the passenger side airbags are deactivated. On some ON versions, in case of failure of the LED (located on the dashboard), warning light appears on the instrument panel. STARTING AND DRIVING Let’s get to the core of the vehicle: seeing how you can exploit all of its potential to the full. We’ll look at how to drive it safely in any situation, so that it can be a welcome companion, with our comfort and our wallets in mind. STARTING THE ENGINE ............. WHEN PARKED ......................... MANUAL TRANSMISSION .......... AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..... "DRIVE MODE" FUNCTION.......... START&STOP SYSTEM .............. CRUISE CONTROL (constant speed regulator) ......................... ENGINE IDLE PRESET ................ SPEED BLOCK .......................... PARKING SENSORS .................. REAR CAMERA (PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA) .......... TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION..... FULL BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM ................................... SAVING FUEL............................ REFUELLING THE VEHICLE ........ AdBlue® (UREA) ADDITIVE FOR DIESEL EMISSIONS ................... VERSION WITH METHANE SYSTEM (Natural Power) ............. LOADING ADVICE ...................... TOWING TRAILERS.................... VEHICLE INACTIVITY.................. 118 119 121 122 125 125 126 128 129 130 131 132 133 137 137 141 142 143 144 150 117 STARTING AND DRIVING STARTING THE ENGINE The vehicle is fitted with an electronic engine lock device: if the engine fails to start, see the paragraph “The Fiat CODE system” in section “Know your vehicle”. Before starting the vehicle, adjust the seat, the interior rear view mirrors, the door mirrors and fasten the seat belts correctly. Never press the accelerator pedal for starting the engine. WARNING If the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal are accidentally pressed at the same time, the system will consider the braking request has having a higher priority. In this condition, the engine will switch to recovery mode and performance (engine torque and vehicle speed) will be limited. To restore normal operation, simply release the accelerator pedal. It is not necessary to stop and start the engine. 122) 14) 15) PROCEDURE FOR VERSIONS WITH MANUAL TRANSMISSION Proceed as follows: engage the handbrake; put the gear lever into neutral; turn the ignition key to MAR: the warning lights and on the instrument panel will turn on; wait for the warning lights and to switch off. The hotter the engine is, the quicker this will happen; fully depress the clutch pedal without touching the accelerator; turn the ignition key to AVV as soon switches off. as warning light Waiting too long will waste the heating work carried out by the plugs. Release the key as soon as the engine starts. 16) PROCEDURE FOR VERSIONS WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Starting the engine is allowed only when the gear lever is in position P or N, so when the engine is started, the system is at position N or P (the latter means neutral, but the vehicle wheels are locked mechanically). 16) 118 DRIVING OFF IN THE VEHICLE To move the vehicle, from position P press the brake pedal and move the lever to the desired position (D or "Sequential mode") to move forward or R to engage reverse). The display will show the gear engaged. When the brake pedal is released, the vehicle starts moving forwards or backwards, as soon as the manoeuvre is activated ("creeping" effect). The accelerator should not be pressed in this case. WARNING The inconsistency between the speed actually engaged (shown on the display) and the position of the gear lever is indicated by the letter corresponding to the position of the gear lever flashing on the panel (also accompanied by an acoustic warning). This condition should not be interpreted as an operational fault, but simply as a request by the system to repeat the manoeuvre. WARNING With the parking brake released and brake pedal released, engine at idling speed and gear lever in position D, R or sequential, pay the utmost care because the car can move even without the operation of the accelerator pedal. This condition can be used with the vehicle on a level surface during tight parking manoeuvres using the brake pedal only. carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and other toxic gasses. IMPORTANT 17) PROCEDURE FOR NATURAL POWER VERSIONS (for versions/markets, where provided) The various engine cranking methods are described below: METHANE tank not in reserve – petrol tank not empty: the engine starts with methane supply; METHANE tank empty – petrol tank not empty: the engine is forced to start on petrol and it will not switch to methane until the methane tank has been filled. At the same time, the reserve warning light will turn on and the "REFUELLING REQUIRED" message will be shown on the instrument panel display; METHANE tank not in reserve – petrol tank empty: the engine starts with methane supply. 18) 19) 20) 21) 16) WARNING 122) It is dangerous to run the engine in enclosed areas. The engine consumes oxygen and engine exhaust contains 14) It is advisable not to demand maximum performance from your vehicle (e.g. excessive acceleration, long distances at high speeds, excessive intense braking, etc.) during the initial period of use. 15) When the engine is switched off never leave the ignition device in the MAR position to prevent useless current absorption from draining the battery. 16) In some cases, when the engine switches off, the fan could activate for max. 120 seconds. 17) If the engine fails to start with a gear engaged, the potentially dangerous situation due to the fact that the transmission is automatically placed in neutral will be signalled by a buzzer. 18) If the warning light flashes for 60 seconds after starting or during an extended towing period, this indicates an anomaly in the glow plug pre­heating system. Use the vehicle normally if the engine starts, but contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. 19) Remember that the brake servo and power steering are not operational until the engine has been started, so you need to apply much more force than usual to the brake pedal and steering wheel. 20) Never bump start the engine by pushing, towing or coasting downhill. This could cause fuel to flow into the catalytic converter and damage it beyond repair. 21) A quick burst on the accelerator before stopping the engine serves no practical purpose; it wastes fuel and is especially damaging to turbocharged engines. WHEN PARKED 123) 22) Proceed as follows when parking and leaving the vehicle: engage a gear (1st gear if facing uphill or reverse if facing downhill) and leave the wheels turned; stop the engine and engage the handbrake; always remove the ignition key. If the vehicle is parked on a steep slope, it is advisable to block the wheels with a wedge or stone. WARNING NEVER leave the vehicle with the gearbox in neutral or, on versions equipped with automatic transmission, before placing the gear lever at P). VERSIONS WITH MANUAL GEARBOX Proceed as follows: engage a gear (1stgear if parked uphill or reverse if facing downhill) and 119 STARTING AND DRIVING leave the wheels turned. stop the engine and engage the handbrake; If the vehicle is parked on a steep slope, it is advisable to block the wheels with a wedge or stone. Do not leave the key in the ignition as this drains the battery. Always remove the key when you leave the vehicle. VERSIONS WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION On versions with automatic transmission, keep the brake pedal pressed, apply the parking brake and engage the gear lever in position (P), wait for the letter P to appear on the display, after which the brake pedal can be released. IMPORTANT NOTES With the vehicle stationary and a gear engaged, always keep the brake pedal pressed until you decide to set off, then release the brake and accelerate gently; during prolonged stops with the engine running, it is advisable to keep the gearbox in neutral (N); to keep the clutch in good condition, do not use the accelerator to keep the vehicle stationary (e.g. when stopped facing uphill); the clutch could be 120 damaged by overheating. Use the brake pedal instead and operate the accelerator only when you are ready to set off; only use second gear when you need greater control for starting manoeuvres on surfaces with poor grip; if, with reverse gear (R) engaged, you have to engage first gear or vice versa, only do this when the vehicle is completely stationary and with the brake pedal pressed; although it is strongly inadvisable, if you are driving downhill and, for unexpected reasons, you let the vehicle move forward with the transmission in neutral (N), when you engage a gear, the system will automatically engage the best gear to transmit the correct drive torque to the wheels depending on the vehicle speed; When necessary, you can engage 1st, (R) or (N) with the engine off, the key in the MAR position and the brake pressed. In this case, gear shifts must be made allowing at least 5 minutes to elapse between one gear shift and the next to safeguard the operation of the hydraulic system and the pump in particular; for hill starts, accelerating gradually but fully straight after having released the handbrake or the brake pedal allows the engine to greatly increase the number of revs and tackle steeper slopes with more torque at the wheels. on gradients > 5% it is prohibited to engage the 2nd gear with vehicle stationary. HANDBRAKE To apply the handbrake: the handbrake lever is located on the left side of the driver's seat. Pull the lever upwards to engage the handbrake and ensure that the vehicle does not move. To release the handbrake: slightly raise the lever, hold the button A pressed and check that the warning light switches off on the instrument panel. Press the brake pedal when carrying out this operation to prevent the vehicle from moving accidentally. WARNING Make sure that the handbrake is engaged in such a way as to ensure the stationing of the vehicle, especially in the case of steep slopes and full load. WARNING Apply the handbrake only when the vehicle is at a standstill or with the vehicle in motion only in the event of a failure in the hydraulic system. If exceptional use is made of the handbrake with the vehicle in motion, moderate traction is advisable in order not to cause locking of the rear end with consequent swerving of the vehicle. WARNING MANUAL TRANSMISSION To engage the gears, press the clutch pedal fully and put the gear lever into the required position (the diagram for gear engagement is shown on the lever knob (A) fig. 133). 123) Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Always remove the key from the ignition device when leaving the vehicle and take it out with you. 124) 23) WARNING 124) Press the clutch pedal fully to shift gears correctly. It is therefore essential that there is nothing under the pedals: make sure the mats are lying flat and do not get in the way of the pedals. IMPORTANT 22) If the vehicle is equipped with self-levelling air suspension, always check that there is sufficient space above the roof and around the vehicle when parking. Indeed, the vehicle could raise (or lower) automatically depending on load or temperature changes. To engage reverse (R) from neutral, proceed as follows: raise sliding ring (A) under the knob and at the same time move the gear lever to the left and then forwards. 133 F1A0492 To engage 6th gear, operate the lever by pressing it towards the right in order to avoid engaging 4th gear by mistake. The same applies to the shift from 6th to 5th gear. WARNING Reverse may only be engaged when the vehicle is at a standstill. With the engine running, wait for at least 2 seconds with the clutch pedal fully depressed before engaging reverse to prevent damage to the gears and grating. IMPORTANT 23) Do not drive with your hand resting on the gear lever as the force exerted, even if slight, could lead over time to premature wear of the gearbox internal components. The clutch pedal should be used only for gear changes. Do not drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, however lightly. For versions/markets where provided, the electronic clutch control could cut in, interpreting the incorrect driving style as a fault. 121 STARTING AND DRIVING AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (for versions/markets, where provided) The vehicle can be equipped with a 9-speed automatic transmission. The transmission can operate in two different modes: “Automatic mode” or “Sequential mode”. GEAR LEVER 125) 126) 127) 128) 129) 130) 24) The gear engaged is shown on the display. If the transmission is used in "sequential" mode, which is activated moving the lever from D (Drive) to the left, the various positions can be reached towards + or –. These positions are unstable. The lever returns to intermediate position. To exit position P (Park), or to pass from position N (Neutral) to position D (Drive) or R (Reverse) when the vehicle is stopped or is moving at a low speed, the brake pedal must be pressed either (see "Gear engagement disabling system with brake engaged" in this chapter). WARNING DO NOT accelerate while shifting from position P (or N) to another position. 134 F1A0466 The (1) lever has the following positions: P = Park R = Reverse N = Neutral D = Drive, (automatic forward speed) AutoStick: + shifting to higher gear in sequential driving mode; – shifting to lower gear in sequential driving mode. 122 WARNING After selecting a gear, wait a few seconds before accelerating. This precaution is particularly important with a cold engine. AUTOMATIC DRIVING MODE To select the automatic driving mode, you need to shift the gear lever to D. The best ratio is selected by the control unit depending speed, engine load (accelerator pedal position) and gradient of the road. D can be selected from sequential operation in any driving conditions. “Kick-Down” function To resume speed quickly, when the accelerator pedal is pressed fully, the transmission control system downshifts (kick-down function). WARNING When driving on roads with poor grip conditions (snow, ice, etc.) avoid activating the kick-down function. SEQUENTIAL DRIVING MODE - AUTOSTICK In the case of frequent gearshifting (e.g. when the vehicle is driven with a heavy load, on slopes, with strong headwind or when towing heavy trailers), it is recommended to use the Autostick (sequential shifting) mode to select and keep a lower fixed ratio. It is possible to shift from position D (Drive) to the sequential mode regardless of vehicle speed. Activation With gear lever in position D (Drive), to activate the sequential drive mode, move the lever to the left (– and + indication of the panel). The gear engaged will be shown on the display. Gearshifting is made by moving the gear lever forwards, towards symbol – or backwards, towards symbol +. Deactivation Bring the gear lever back in position D (Drive) ("automatic" driving mode). TRANSMISSION EMERGENCY FUNCTION (where provided) Transmission operation is constantly monitored to detect any fault. If a condition that might damage the transmission is detected, the "transmission emergency" function is activated. In this condition, the transmission stays in 4th gear, regardless of the selected gear. Positions P (Parking), R (Reverse) and N (Neutral) still work. Icon might light up on the display. In the event of a "transmission emergency" immediately contact the nearest Fiat Dealership. Temporary failure In the event of a temporary failure, correct transmission operation can be restored for all the forwards gears by proceeding as follows: stop the vehicle; bring the transmission lever to P (Park); bring the ignition device to STOP; wait for about 10 seconds, then restart the engine; select the desired gear: if the problem is not detected any more the transmission correct operation is restored. WARNING In the event of a temporary failure it is in any case recommended to contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. IGNITION LOCK AND PARK POSITION This function requires the gear lever to be positioned at P (Park) before extracting the key from the ignition device. If the vehicle battery is flat and the ignition key is engaged, the latter is locked in position. To remove the key manually see paragraph "Automatic transmission lever unlock" in chapter "In an emergency". LEVER MOVEMENT INHIBITION This system prevents you from moving the gear lever from position P if the brake pedal has not been previously pressed. To bring the gear lever to a position other than P or from N to R, the ignition device must be in position MAR (engine on or off) and the brake pedal must be pressed. The lever will remain locked in the P position in case of faults or flat battery. See the “Automatic transmission” paragraph in the “In an emergency” chapter for how to release the lever manually. With the ignition device in MAR (engine started), if the lever remains in position N for more than about 10 seconds, it will be necessary to press the brake to be able to engage the gear (R and D). A message on the instrument panel will remind you that the brake must be pressed to shift gear. In this case the lever will not lock from position N, the gear is not shifted without pressing the brake and an error message will appear with the request to repeat the manoeuvre. IMPORTANT NOTES Failure to comply with what is reported below may damage the transmission: select position P (Park) only with the vehicle at a standstill; select position R (Reverse), or pass from R to another position only with the vehicle at a standstill and engine idling; 123 STARTING AND DRIVING 124 do not shift gears between positions P (Park), R (Reverse), N (Neutral) or D (Drive) with engine running at a speed above idling. Before engaging any gear position, fully depress the brake pedal; keep the brake pedal pressed while moving the gear lever in a position different from P (Park); unexpected movement of the vehicle can injure the occupants or people nearby. Do not leave the vehicle with engine running: before getting out of the passenger compartment always engage the parking brake, bring the gear lever to P (Park), switch off the engine and extract the key from the ignition device (for versions with mechanical key). With ignition device at STOP (key extraction allowed), the transmission is locked in position P (Park), to prevent any accidental movement of the vehicle; when getting out of the vehicle, always remove the mechanical key from the ignition device and close all the doors. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle; bringing the transmission to a position different from P (Park) or N (Neutral) at an engine speed higher than idling is dangerous; if the brake pedal is not fully pressed, the vehicle could rapidly accelerate. Only engage the gear with engine at idling, fully depressing the brake pedal; if the transmission temperature exceeds the normal operating limits, the transmission control unit may change the gear engagement order and reduce the drive torque; if the transmission overheats the fluid overheating icon appears on the display. In this case the transmission could operate incorrectly until it cools down; when using the vehicle with extremely low external temperatures, the transmission operation may change according to engine temperature and vehicle speed: activation of the higher gears could be inhibited until the transmission oil is correctly warmed up; this function accelerates engine and transmission warming up. Complete operation of the transmission will be enabled as soon as the oil temperature reaches the predefined value. WARNING 125) Never use position P instead of the parking brake. Always engage the parking brake when parking the vehicle to prevent injury or damage caused by the unexpected movement of the vehicle. 126) If the P position is not engaged, the vehicle could move and injure people. Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the gear lever is in position P and that the parking brake is engaged. 127) Do not shift the gear lever to N and do not stop the engine when driving on a downhill road. This type of driving is dangerous and reduces the possibility of intervening in the case of variation of the road traffic or surface. You risk losing control of the vehicle and causing accidents. 128) Before moving the gear lever from position P, bring the ignition device to position MAR and press the brake pedal. Otherwise, the gear lever may get damaged. 129) Engage reverse only with the vehicle stationary, engine at idling speed and accelerator fully released. 130) Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. In addition, always remove the ignition key when leaving the vehicle and take it out with you. IMPORTANT 24) If the vehicle is on a slope, always engage the parking brake BEFORE moving the shift lever to the P position. START&STOP SYSTEM "DRIVE MODE" FUNCTION (for versions/markets, where provided) IN BRIEF 136 135 F1A0467 This device, in combination with the automatic transmission, can be used to set three different driving modes ("vehicle response") according to the driver's needs and road conditions: "Normal", "Power" or "Eco". The mode is selected by pressing button (A) fig. 135 on the dashboard. The selected mode is displayed on the instrument panel display (A) fig. 136. F1A0491 The device, using the on-board electronics, acts on the transmission and interfaces with the instrument panel. Engagement of the required driving mode is indicated on the instrument panel display. The system automatically turns on "Normal" mode when the engine is started. FAULT INDICATIONS In the event of a fault in the system or selector, mode change is automatically disabled. The system will automatically switch to "Normal" mode. The Start&Stop device automatically stops the engine each time the vehicle is stationary and all the conditions for automatic switch-off have been met, and starts it again when the driver wants to move off. This improves the efficiency of the vehicle by reducing fuel consumption, the emission of harmful gases and noise pollution. OPERATING MODE Stopping the engine Versions with manual gearbox With the vehicle stationary, the engine stops with the gearbox in neutral and the clutch pedal released. Versions with automatic transmission With vehicle at a standstill and brake pedal pressed, the engine switches off if the gear lever is in a position other than (R). NOTE On versions with automatic transmission In the event of stops 125 STARTING AND DRIVING 126 uphill, the engine switching off is disabled to activate the "Hill Start Assist" function (works only with running engine). NOTE After automatic restarting, for the Stop&Start system to intervene again simply move the vehicle (at speed higher than 0.5 km/h for versions with automatic transmission or 7 km/h for versions with manual transmission). The warning light on the instrument panel switches on to signal that the engine has stopped. Restarting the engine Versions with manual gearbox Depress the clutch pedal to restart the engine. Versions with automatic transmission To restart the engine, release the brake pedal. The icon on the display switches off. With brake pressed, if the gear lever is in automatic mode - D (Drive) - the engine can be restarted by moving the lever to R (Reverse) or N (Neutral). With brake pressed, if the gear lever is in "AutoStick" mode, the engine can be restarted by moving the lever to "+" or "–", or R (Reverse) or N (Neutral). When the engine has been stopped automatically, keeping the brake pedal pressed, the brake can be released keeping the engine off by quickly shifting the gear lever to P (Park). To restart the engine, just move the lever out of position P. MANUAL ACTIVATION AND DEACTIVATION OF THE SYSTEM To activate/deactivate the system manually, press the button on the dashboard control panel. 25) SAFETY FUNCTIONS In engine cut-out conditions through the Start&Stop system, if the driver unfastens his/her seat belt and opens the driver's door or the passenger door, the engine can be restarted only by using the key. The driver is notified of this condition by a buzzer, through the instrument panel warning light flashing and, where provided, by a message in the display. 131) 132) WARNING 131) The vehicle should always be evacuated after the key has been removed or turned to the STOP position. When refuelling, make sure that the vehicle is switched off with the key in the STOP position. 132) If the battery needs to be replaced, always contact a Fiat Dealership. The replacement battery should be of the same type (L6 105Ah/850A) and should have the same characteristics. IMPORTANT 25) If the vehicle is equipped with manual climate control, if you want to favour climate comfort, the Start&Stop system can be deactivated for continuous climate control system operation. CRUISE CONTROL (constant speed regulator) (for versions/markets, where provided) IN BRIEF This is an electronic driving aid that allows you to drive at a speed of above 30 km/h on long and straight dry roads with few driving changes (e.g. motorways) at a preset speed without having to press the accelerator pedal. It is therefore not recommended to use this device on extra-urban roads with traffic. Do not use the device in town. Activating the device Turn ring (A) fig. 137 - fig. 138 to ON or (according to the version). The device cannot be engaged in 1st or reverse gear but it is advisable to engage it in 4th gear or higher. Versions without Speed Limiter (fig. 137) 137 F1A0364 Versions with Speed Limiter (fig. 138) 138 F1A0363 When travelling downhill with the device engaged, the vehicle speed may slightly exceed the stored one. When the device is activated the warning light comes on together with the relevant message on the instrument panel. Storing vehicle speed Proceed as follows: turn ring (A) fig. 137 - fig. 138 to ON (according to the version) and or press the accelerator pedal so that the vehicle reaches the desired speed; move the stalk upwards (+) for at least one second, then release it. The vehicle speed is now stored and you can therefore release the accelerator pedal. Increasing/reducing the stored speed Once the Cruise Control is activated, you can increase the speed by moving the lever upwards (+) or decrease it by moving the lever downwards (-). Each movement of the stalk will correspond to a slight reduction in speed of about 1 km/h, while keeping the stalk held downwards will decrease the speed continuously. Deactivating the device The device can be switched off by the driver in the following ways: turning ring (A) to OFF or (according to the version); by switching off the engine; Deactivating the function The device can be switched off by the driver in the following ways: turning ring (A) to OFF or (according to the version); pressing the button (B), both with symbol and symbol CANC/RES, the system pauses; by switching off the engine; by pressing the brake pedal or operating the handbrake; by pressing the clutch pedal; requesting a gear shift with an automatic transmission in sequential mode; with the vehicle speed below the set limit; by pressing the accelerator pedal; in this case the system is not actually turned off but the acceleration request takes priority; the Cruise Control remains activated, without the need to press the CANC/RES button to restore the previous conditions once the acceleration is over. The device is automatically switched off in the following cases: if the ABS or ESC systems intervene; in the event of system failure. 133) 134) 127 STARTING AND DRIVING SPEED LIMITER This device allows the vehicle speed to be limited to a value set by the driver. The maximum speed can be set both with vehicle stationary and in motion. The minimum speed that can be set is 30 km/h. When the device is active, the vehicle speed depends on the pressure at the accelerator pedal, until the set speed limit is reached. If necessary (in the event of overtaking for example), the set speed limit can be exceeded by fully depressing the accelerator pedal. By gradually reducing the pressure on the accelerator pedal, the function will be reactivated as soon as the vehicle speed drops below the programmed speed. Activating the device To activate the device, turn ring (A) fig. 139 to position . When the device is turned on, the warning light on the instrument panel turns on and, on some versions, a message and the last programmed speed value appears on the display. Automatic device deactivation The device deactivates automatically in the event of fault in the system. WARNING 133) While driving with the device active, never move the gear lever to neutral. 134) If the device is faulty, turn ring A to , check the fuse and contact a Fiat Dealership. ENGINE IDLE PRESET (for versions/markets, where provided) The engine idle speed setting is a feature which can be used to manually set the engine idle speed using the Cruise Control and Speed Limiter control ring fig. 140. The function is usually used in case of: "Power Take-Off" connection; heating of the engine and/or the passenger compartment. The function is only available on versions with Cruise Control and Speed Limiter. ACTIVATING THE DEVICE 140 139 128 F1A0363 F1A0363 Turn the ring fig. 140 to . By pressing button (B), the system sets the engine idle speed to the previously stored value. If no values are stored, the system sets the minimum speed to a default value (900 rpm). Activation of the device is indicated by the respective message on the instrument panel. The device can be activated if the following conditions are met: handbrake applied; clutch pedal released (for versions with manual transmission); brake pedal released; vehicle speed equal to 0 km/h; clutch pedal pressed and released at least once during the key-on cycle (for versions with manual transmission); gear shift lever in position P (for versions with automatic transmission). A specific message will appear if you attempt to activate the device (by pressing button (B)) when not all the conditions listed above are met. INCREASING/DECREASING AND STORING ENGINE IDLE PRESET Once the device is activated, you can increase/decrease the engine idle speed by moving the stalk up (+) or decrease it by moving the stalk down (-). Each time the stalk is operated, the engine idle speed is increased/decreased by about 50 rpm, while keeping the stalk up/down, the engine idle speed varies continuously by a fixed gradient up to a minimum/maximum allowed value (minimum: 900 rpm - maximum: 2200 rpm). Under these conditions, holding button (B) pressed will cause the system to store the current engine idle speed as a new preset value. The storage of the new engine idle speed value is indicated by a message on the instrument panel. DEACTIVATING THE DEVICE Once the engine idle speed setting has been activated, the device can be switched off by pressing and releasing button (B). The device will be switched off even if one of the following conditions occurs: ring moved from position ; handbrake released; clutch pedal pressed (for versions with manual transmission); the brake pedal is pressed; vehicle speed higher than 0 km/h; lever in position other than (P for versions with automatic transmission). Deactivation of the device is indicated by the respective message button instrument panel. SPEED BLOCK (for versions/markets, where provided) The vehicle is equipped with a speed limitation function that can be set on the user's request to one of four default values: 90, 100, 110, 130 km/h. To activate/deactivate this function, contact a Fiat Dealership. Following the operation, a sticker will be applied to the windscreen showing the top speed setting. WARNING The speedometer could indicate a higher maximum speed than the effective one, set by the Dealership, in accordance with the regulations in force. 129 STARTING AND DRIVING PARKING SENSORS These are located in the rear bumper of the vehicle fig. 141 and their function is to inform the driver, through an intermittent buzzer, about the presence of obstacles behind the vehicle. 141 F1A0134 ACTIVATION The sensors are automatically activated when reverse gear is engaged. As the obstacle behind the vehicle gets closer to the bumper, the frequency of the acoustic signal increases. ACOUSTIC WARNING When reverse gear is engaged an intermittent acoustic signal is automatically activated. The acoustic warning: increases as the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle decreases; becomes continuous when the distance between the vehicle and the 130 obstacle is less than 30 cm and stops immediately if the distance increases; it remains constant if the distance remains unchanged; if this situation concerns the side sensors, the buzzer will stop after about 3 seconds to avoid, for example, warning indications in the event of manoeuvres along walls. If several obstacles are detected by the sensors, only the nearest one is considered. FAULT INDICATIONS Any parking sensor faults will be indicated when reverse is engaged in the by the warning light instrument panel or by the icon on the display and by the message in the multifunction display (for versions/markets, where provided) OPERATION WITH A TRAILER Parking sensor operation is automatically deactivated when the electric cable plug of the trailer is inserted into the vehicle tow hook socket. The sensors are automatically reactivated when the trailer's cable plug is removed. 135) 26) WARNING If you wish to leave the tow hook fitted without towing a trailer, it is advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership for the relevant system update operations because the tow hook could be detected as an obstacle by the central sensors. When using special washing equipment such as high pressure jets or steam cleaning, clean the sensors very quickly keeping the jet more than 10 cm away. WARNINGS Do not apply stickers to the sensors. When parking, take the utmost care over obstacles that may be above or under the sensor. Objects close to the vehicle, in certain circumstances are not detected and could therefore cause damage to the vehicle or be damaged. The following conditions may influence the performance of the parking assistance system: Reduced sensor sensitivity and a reduction in the parking assistance system performance could be due to the presence on the surface of the sensor of: ice, snow, mud, thick paint. The sensor may detect a nonexistent obstacle (echo noise) due to mechanical noises, for example when washing the vehicle, in case of rain, strong wind, hail. The warnings sent by the sensor can also be altered by the presence of ultrasonic systems (e.g. pneumatic brakes of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the vehicle. The performance of the parking assistance system may also be affected by the position of the sensors. For example by a change in the ride setting (caused by the wear of the shock absorbers, suspension), changing the tyres, overloading the vehicle and carrying out specific tuning operations that require the vehicle to be lowered. Detection of obstacles in the upper part of the vehicle (particularly in the case of vans or chassis cabs) may not be guaranteed because the system detects obstacles that could strike the lower part of the vehicle. WARNING 135) The driver is always responsible for parking and other dangerous manoeuvres. While carrying out these manoeuvres, always make sure that no people (especially children) or animals are in the area concerned. The parking sensors are used to assist the driver, who must never allow his attention to lapse during potentially dangerous manoeuvres, even those executed at low speeds. IMPORTANT The table below shows the approximate distances for each area: 26) The sensor must be free of mud, dirt, snow or ice in order for the system to work. Be careful not to scratch or damage the sensors while cleaning them. Avoid using dry, rough or hard cloths. The sensors must be washed using clean water, with the addition of vehicle shampoo if necessary. REAR CAMERA (PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA) (for versions/markets, where provided) 136) 27) The vehicle may be equipped with a ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera, which allows the driver to see the surrounding area behind the vehicle on the display when reverse is engaged or the tailgate is opened fig. 142. SYMBOLS AND MESSAGES ON THE DISPLAY When displayed, the static line grid shows the width of the vehicle. The grid shows separate areas, allowing you to see the distance from the rear of the vehicle. 142 F1A0479 Approximate distances for zone Zone (see figure) Distance from the rear of the vehicle Red (A) 0–30 cm Yellow (B) 30–100 cm Green (C) 1 m or more 131 STARTING AND DRIVING IMPORTANT NOTES WARNING In some circumstances, such as with ice, snow or mud on the surface of the camera, its sensitivity may be reduced. WARNING If the rear doors need to be re-painted after the repairs, make sure the paint does not get in contact with the plastic support of the camera. WARNING When parking, take the utmost care over obstacles that may be above or under the camera range. WARNING 136) The responsibility for parking and other manoeuvres is always and in any case charged to the driver. While carrying out these manoeuvres, always make sure that no people (especially children) or animals are in the area concerned. The camera is an aid for the driver, but the driver must never allow his/her attention to lapse during potentially dangerous manoeuvres, even those executed at low speeds. Always keep a slow speed, so as to promptly brake in the case of obstacles. 132 IMPORTANT 27) It is vital, for correct operation, that the camera is always kept clean and free from any mud, dirt, snow or ice. Be careful not to scratch or damage the camera while cleaning it. Avoid using dry, rough or hard cloths. The camera must be washed using clean water, with the addition of vehicle shampoo if necessary. In washing stations which use steam or high-pressure jets, clean the camera quickly, keeping the nozzle more than 10 cm away from the sensors. Also, do not apply stickers to the camera. TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION WARNING The system is designed to read signs complying with the specifications of the Vienna convention. USE OF THE TRAFFIC SIGN RECOGNITION System switching on and off The system can be activated/deactivated using the display menu. Refer to the "Display" paragraph in the "Knowing the instrument panel" chapter. N.B.: the system condition and settings do not change throughout the different on-off cycles. (for versions/markets, where provided) 100 137) 138) 139) 140) 28) 29) 30) 31) 32) 33) 34) The system automatically detects the recognisable traffic signs: speed limits, no overtaking signs and signs indicating the end of such prohibitions. The camera is fitted behind the internal rear view mirror. The sensor always checks the traffic signs indicating the current speed limit and possible no overtaking signs. 143 F1A0373 WARNING 137) If the camera loses its position due to a load variation, the system may not work temporarily to allow the camera to perform an auto-calibration. 138) The system only detects the preset traffic signs. If the minimum visibility conditions and distance from the sign are met it can detect all traffic signs. 139) The system is a driving assistance system but it does not relieve the driver of the responsibility of driving with due attention and diligence in compliance with the laws in force. 140) When the system is active, the driver is responsible for controlling the vehicle and monitoring the system, and must intervene as appropriate if necessary. FULL BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM 141) 142) 143) 144) 35) 36) 37) 38) 39) 40) (for versions/markets, where provided) This is a driving assist system consisting of a camera mounted in the middle of the windscreen fig. 144. IMPORTANT 28) If the sensor is obstructed the system may not work. 29) At low temperatures and in particularly adverse weather conditions, the system may not work. 30) Rain, snow, splashes and strong light contrast may influence the sensor. 31) Do not repair the area of the windscreen directly surrounding the sensor. 32) If the vehicle is equipped with a nongenuine suspension kit, the system may not work correctly. 33) Always use genuine spare parts when replacing the bulbs of the headlights. Other bulbs may reduce the system performance. 34) Clean the windscreen from foreign matters such as bird droppings, insects, snow or ice. 144 F1A0998 In the event of an imminent collision the system intervenes by automatically braking the vehicle to prevent the impact or reduce its effects. The system provides the driver with acoustic and visual signals through specific messages on the instrument panel display. The system may lightly brake to warn the driver if a possible frontal accident is detected (limited braking). Signals and limited braking are intended to allow the driver to react promptly, in order to prevent or reduce the effects of a potential accident. In situations with the risk of collision, if the system detects no intervention by the driver, it provides automatic braking to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential frontal accident (automatic braking). If intervention by the driver on the brake pedal is detected but not deemed sufficient, the system may intervene in order to improve the reaction of the braking system, therefore reducing vehicle speed further (additional assistance in braking stage). Versions equipped with manual gearbox: at the end of the automatic braking the engine may stall and turn off, unless the driver presses the clutch pedal. Versions equipped with automatic transmission: at the end of the braking, the latest stored gear is engaged: the vehicle may therefore restart after a few seconds. WARNING Both on versions equipped with manual transmission and on those with automatic transmission, after the vehicle is stopped the brake callipers may be locked for about 2 seconds for safety reasons. Make sure you press the brake pedal if the vehicle moves slightly forwards. 133 STARTING AND DRIVING Engagement / disengagement Full Brake Control can be turned off (and then on again) using the Uconnect™ system (where provided) (see relevant section), or from the instrument panel (see relevant section). The system can be turned off even with the starter switch at MAR. The system can be set to two activation levels: System active: the system (if active), in addition to the visual and acoustic warnings, provides limited braking, automatic braking and additional assistance in braking stage, where the driver does not brake sufficiently in the event of a potential frontal accident; System deactivated: the system does not provide visual and acoustic warnings, limited braking, automatic braking or additional assistance in braking stage. The system will therefore provide no indication of a possible accident. Activation / deactivation If the Full Brake Control system has been correctly activated, it will be active each time the engine is started. The system is deactivated if this is selected on the instrument panel or Uconnect™ system menu. 134 Following a deactivation, the system will not warn the driver about the possible accident with the preceding vehicle, regardless of the setting selected. The system activation status will not be kept in the memory when the engine is switched off: if the system is deactivated when the engine is switched off, it will be active when it its next started. After a deactivation, the system can be reactivated from the Uconnect™ system or instrument panel menu. The function is not active at speed above 5 km/h. The system is only active if: it has been activated correctly; it has not been deactivated using the instrument panel or Uconnect™ system menu; the ignition device is at MAR; the vehicle speed is greater than 5 km/h. Changing the system sensitivity The sensitivity of the system can be changed through the Uconnect™ system or instrument cluster menu, choosing from one of the following three options: "Near", "Med" or "Far". See the description in the Uconnect™ supplement for how to change the settings. The pre-set option is "Med". With this setting, the system warns the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front when that vehicle is at a standard distance, between that of the other two settings. This setting offers the driver reaction time longer than that of the "Near" setting but shorter than that of the "Far" setting in the event of a potential accident. By setting system sensitivity to "Near", the system warns the driver of a possible accident with the vehicle in front when that vehicle is a short distance away. With the system sensitivity set to "Far", the system will warn the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in front when that vehicle is at a greater distance, thus providing the possibility of acting on the brakes more lightly and gradually. This setting provides the drivers with the maximum possible reaction time to prevent a potential accident. The system sensitivity setting is kept in the memory when the engine is switched off. Function temporarily not available warning If the fault light comes on and the dedicated message is displayed, a condition temporarily disabling operation of the system may have occurred. The main possible causes of this temporary blinding are weatherrelated (heavy rain, fog, sun low down on the horizon, etc.). Although the vehicle can still be driven in normal conditions, the system may be temporarily not available. When the conditions limiting the system functions end, this will go back to normal and complete operation. Should the fault persist, contact a Fiat Dealership. Warning of system disabling due to an obstruction If the dedicated message is displayed, a condition disabling operation of the system may have occurred. The possible cause of this disabling is a camera obstruction. If an obstruction is signalled, clean the area of the windscreen indicated in fig. 144 and check that the message has disappeared. Although the vehicle can still be driven in normal conditions, the system is not available. When the conditions disabling the system functions end, it will return to normal and complete operation. Should the fault persist, contact a Fiat Dealership. System failure warning If the system switches off and a dedicated message is shown on the display, it means that there is a failure on the system. In this case, it is still possible to drive the vehicle, but you are advised to contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. Driving in special conditions In certain driving conditions, such as, for example: driving close to a bend; vehicles with small dimensions and/or not aligned in the driving lane; lane change by other vehicles; vehicles travelling at right angles to the vehicle. system intervention might be unexpected or delayed. The driver must therefore be very careful, keeping control of the vehicle to drive in complete safety. the Uconnect™ system or the instrument panel. Driving close to a bend When entering or leaving a wide bend, the system may detect a vehicle that is in front of you, but that is not driving in the same lane fig. 145. In cases such as these, the system may intervene. 145 F1A0997 Vehicles with small dimensions and/or not aligned in the driving lane The system cannot detect vehicles in front of you but outside the camera's field of vision and may therefore not react in the presence of small vehicles, such as motorbikes. WARNING In particularly complex traffic conditions, the driver can deactivate the system manually through 135 STARTING AND DRIVING accident in advance. Failure to take into account this warning may lead to serious or fatal injuries. In case of complex scenarios, unexpected or unnecessary warnings or braking may occur. WARNING 146 F1A0996 Lane change by other vehicles Vehicles suddenly changing lane, entering the same lane as your vehicle and this moving into the camera's field of vision, may cause the system to intervene fig. 147. 147 F1A0995 Important notes The system has not been designed to prevent impacts and cannot detect possible conditions leading to an 136 141) The system is an aid for the driver, who must always pay full attention while driving. The responsibility always rests with the driver, who must take into account the traffic conditions in order to drive in complete safety. The driver must always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. 142) If the driver depresses the brake pedal fully or carries out a fast steering during system operation, the automatic braking function may stop (e.g. to allow a possible manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle). 143) The system intervenes on vehicles travelling in the same lane. People, animals and things (e.g. pushchairs) are not taken into consideration. 144) If the vehicle must be placed on a roller bench for maintenance or if it is washed in an automatic car wash with an obstacle in the front part (e.g. another vehicle, a wall or another obstacle), the system may detect its presence and activate. Therefore, in this case the system must be deactivated. IMPORTANT 35) The system may have limited or absent operation due to weather conditions such as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow. 36) System intervention might be unexpected or delayed when other cars transport loads projecting from the side, above or from the rear, with respect to the normal size of the vehicle. 37) Operation can be adversely affected by any structural change made to the vehicle, such as a modification to the front geometry, tyre change, or a heavier than standard load of the vehicle. 38) Incorrect repairs in the zone where the camera is mounted may interfere with its field of vision and reduce its performance (e.g. application of fillers or glues to remove scratches). Go to a Fiat Dealership for any operation of this type. 39) Do not tamper with nor operate on the camera on the windscreen. In the event of a sensor failure, contact a Fiat Dealership. 40) When towing a trailer (with modules installed after purchasing the vehicle) or a vehicle or during loading manoeuvres on a car carrier (or in vehicle for transport), the system must be deactivated. SAVING FUEL Top speed Fuel consumption increases considerably with speed. GENERAL INFORMATION The general factors that affect fuel consumption are listed below. Vehicle maintenance Tyres Unnecessary loads Roof rack/ski rack Electric devices Climate control module Devices for aerodynamic control Acceleration Accelerating violently will greatly affect consumption and emissions: acceleration should be gradual. DRIVING STYLE The main driving styles that affect fuel consumption are listed below. Starting Do not warm up the engine at low or high revs when the vehicle is stationary; this causes the engine to warm up more slowly, thereby increasing fuel consumption and emissions. Unnecessary actions Avoid accelerating when stopped at traffic lights or before switching off the engine. Gear selection In the same way improper use of a high gear increases consumption, emissions and engine wear. CONDITIONS OF USE The main usage conditions that negatively affect fuel consumption are listed below. Cold starting Short journeys and frequent cold starts do not allow the engine to reach optimum operating temperature. Traffic and road conditions Heavy traffic causes high fuel consumption. Winding mountain roads and rough road surfaces also adversely affect consumption. Stops in traffic During prolonged hold-ups (e.g. level crossings) the engine should be switched off. REFUELLING THE VEHICLE IN BRIEF Stop the engine before refuelling. PETROL ENGINES Only use petrol with an octane number (RON) no lower than 95 (EN228 specification). DIESEL ENGINES Only refuel with automotive diesel conforming to the European specification EN590. OPERATION AT LOW TEMPERATURES When using or parking the vehicle for a long time in the mountains or cold areas, it is advisable to refuel using locally available diesel fuel. In this case, it is also advisable to keep the tank over 50% full. 41) REFUELLING CAPACITY To ensure that you fill the tank completely, top up twice after the first click of the fuel supply gun. Further 137 STARTING AND DRIVING top-ups could cause faults in the fuel feeding system. FUEL TANK CAP When refuelling, open flap (A) fig. 148 located on the left side of the vehicle therefore unscrew the cap (B) fig. 148 turning it counter-clockwise. For versions / markets where provided, insert the ignition key in the lock of the cap. Turn the key counter-clockwise and remove the cap by gripping the key. Do not remove the key from the cap during refuelling. During the operation of refuelling, the cap can be hung to its appropriate place located on the door A (A) fig. 148. The sealing may cause a slight pressure increase in the tank. A little breathing off, while slackening the cap is absolutely normal. replacement cap is for the appropriate vehicle. Tighten the cap of the fuel tank filler until you hear a "click". This sound shows that the cap of the fuel tank filler is properly tightened. For versions / markets where provided, turn the key clockwise until it stops. It is not necessary to apply an additional load on the key to complete the tightening of the cap. Only in the case where the cap has been tightened properly, it will be possible to remove the ignition key from the cap. After each refuelling, make sure the fuel filler cap is securely tightened. WARNING When the gun distributor fuel "snaps" or interrupts the supply, the tank is nearly full and you can run two additional top-ups after shooting automatic. 145) 146) 147) 148 In case of loss or damage to the fuel tank cap, make sure that the 138 F1A5004 TOPPING UP AdBlue® DIESEL EMISSIONS ADDITIVE (UREA) Preliminary conditions AdBlue® (UREA) freezes at temperatures lower than -11°C. If the vehicle stands for a long time at this temperature refilling could be difficult. For this reason, it is advised to park the vehicle in a garage and/or heated environment and wait for the AdBlue® (UREA) to return to liquid state before topping up. Proceed as follows: park the vehicle on ground level; stop the engine by turning the ignition device to MAR; open the fuel flap A (A)fig. 148 and then unscrew and remove the cap (C) (blue colour) fig. 148 from the AdBlue® filler. Refilling with nozzles You can fill up at any AdBlue® (UREA) distributor. Proceed as follows: insert the AdBlue® (UREA) nozzle in the filler, start refilling and stop refilling at the first shut-off (the shut-off indicates that the AdBlue® (UREA) tank is full). Do not proceed with the refilling and remove the nozzle to prevent spillage. Refilling with containers Proceed as follows: check the expiration date; read the advice for use on the label before pouring the content of the bottle into the AdBlue® (UREA) tank; if systems which cannot be screwed in (e.g. tanks) are used for refilling, after the indication appears on the instrument panel display (refer to the “Warning lights and messages" paragraph), fill the AdBlue® (UREA) tank with no more than 10 litres; if containers which can be screwed to the filler are used, the reservoir is full when the AdBlue® (UREA) level in the container stops pouring out. Do not proceed further. Operations after refilling Proceed as follows: fit the cap (C)fig. 148 back on the AdBlue® (UREA) filler by turning it clockwise and screwing it completely; set the starter switch to MAR (it is not necessary to start the engine); wait for the indication on the instrument panel to switch off before moving the vehicle. The indication may stay on for a few seconds to approximately half a minute. If the engine is started and the vehicle is moved, the indication will remain on for longer. This will not compromise engine operation; if the AdBlue® was topped up when the tank was empty, refer to the “Refuelling ” paragraph, and wait for 2 minutes before starting the engine. WARNING If AdBlue® (UREA) is spilled out of the filler neck, clean up well the area and proceed to filling up again. If the liquid crystallises, eliminate it with a sponge and warm water. IMPORTANT DO NOT EXCEED THE MAXIMUM LEVEL: this could cause damage to the reservoir. AdBlue® (UREA) freezes at under -11 °C. Although the system is designed to operate below the freezing point of the UREA, it is advisable not to fill the tank beyond the maximum level because if the AdBlue® (UREA) freezes the system can be damaged. Follow the instructions in the “Topping up AdBlue® diesel emissions additive (UREA)” paragraph in this chapter. If the AdBlue® (UREA) is spilled on painted surfaces or aluminium, immediately clean the area with water and use absorbent material to collect the fluid that has been spilled on the ground. Do not try to start the engine if the AdBlue® (UREA) was accidentally added to the Diesel fuel tank, this can result in serious engine damage, contact a Fiat Dealership. Do not add additives or other fluids to AdBlue® (UREA); doing so could damage the system. The use of non-conforming or degraded AdBlue® (UREA) may lead to indications appearing on the instrument panel display (see "Warning lights and messages" paragraph). Never pour AdBlue® (UREA) into another container: it could be contaminated. In case of damage to the sewage system of exhaust gas resulting from the use of additives / tap water, the introduction of diesel fuel, or at least by not fulfilling the requirements, the warranty expires. If the AdBlue® (UREA) runs out, refer to the “Warning lights and messages" paragraph to continue using the vehicle normally. AdBlue ® (UREA) storage AdBlue® (UREA) is considered a very stable product with a long shelf life. Stored at temperatures LOWER than 32°C, it has a shelf life of at least one year. Follow the instructions on the label of the container. AdBlue ® (UREA) tank topping in cold environments Since AdBlue® (UREA) starts to freeze around -11°C, the vehicle is equipped with an automatic system of heating UREA that allows the system to function properly at temperatures below -11°C. If the vehicle remains idle for a long period at temperatures below the 139 STARTING AND DRIVING 11°C, the AdBlue® (UREA) in the tank might freeze. If the AdBlue® (UREA) tank was filled beyond the maximum level and freezes, it can be damaged; for this reason it is advisable not to exceed the maximum level of the tank. Pay extra attention to avoid exceeding the maximum level when you use portable containers for topping up. Fuel storage - Diesel Fuel 148) In case of the storage of massive amounts of fuel, good maintenance is essential. The fuel contaminated with water favours the proliferation of "microbes". These microbes create a "slime" that can clog the filter system and fuel pipes. Remove water from the supply tank and regularly replace the filter pipe. METHANE ENGINES (NATURAL POWER) METHANE GAS FILLER The methane filler is located near the petrol filler. To access the filler, unscrew the cap (A) fig. 149. The profile of the filler is of the universal type, compatible with Italian and "NGV1" standards. In some European countries adapters are considered ILLEGAL (e.g. in Germany). For service stations with cubic metre (m3) nozzles (pressure differential), to measure the residual pressure in the cylinder, the non-return valves must be released by delivering a small amount of methane. WARNING When a Diesel engine runs out of fuel, air is blown through the fuel system. 149 F0N0436 The other plates (provided with the vehicle documentation) contain the 140 date for the first inspection of the cylinders. 42) 43) Fuel - Vehicle compatibility identification - Graphic symbol for informing consumers in accordance with EN16942 The symbols shown below aid recognising the correct fuel type to be used on your vehicle. Before proceeding with refuelling, check the symbols inside the fuel filler flap (where provided) and compare them with the symbols shown on the fuel pump (where provided). Symbols for petrol/methane bi-fuel cars E5: Unleaded petrol containing up to 2.7% (m/m) oxygen and with maximum 5.0% (V/V) ethanol compliant with EN228 E10: Unleaded petrol containing up to 3.7% (m/m) oxygen and with maximum 10.0% (V/V) ethanol compliant with EN228 CNG: Automotive methane and biomethane compliant with EN16723 Symbols for diesel powered cars B7: Diesel containing up to 7% (V/V) of FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Esters) compliant with EN590 WARNING 145) Do not approach naked flames or lit cigarettes to the fuel tank filler: fire risk. Keep your face away from the fuel filler to prevent breathing in harmful vapours. 146) To avoid fuel spillage and the exceeding of the maximum level, avoid topping up after filling the tank. 147) Any fuel pumping in portable containers located on a floor can cause a fire. Danger of burns. Always put the fuel container on the ground during filling. Avoid using contaminated fuel: a fuel contaminated with water or earth can cause serious damage to the engine fuel feed system. Proper maintenance of the fuel filter, of the engine and the fuel tank is essential. 148) Do not open the fuel system at high pressure with the engine running. The operation of the engine creates a high fuel pressure. A jet of high-pressure fuel can cause serious injury or death. IMPORTANT 41) Only refuel with automotive diesel complying with the European specification EN590. The use of other products or mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently invalidate the warranty, due to the damage caused. If you accidentally introduce other types of fuel into the tank, do not start the engine. Empty the tank. If the engine has been run for even an extremely limited amount of time, you must not only drain the fuel tank, but the rest of the supply circuit as well. 42) Methane refuelling stations are not authorised to refill the cylinders when the inspection date has expired. The check valve prevents the methane from flowing back to the fuel filler. 43) If the vehicle has been registered in a country other than Italy, the certification data, identification and inspection procedures for the methane cylinders should conform to the legislation in that country. In any case, it should be remembered that the life of the cylinders is 20 years from the production date as set out in ECE Regulation 110. AdBlue® (UREA) ADDITIVE FOR DIESEL EMISSIONS The vehicle is equipped with an AdBlue® (UREA) injection system and Selective Catalytic Reduction to meet emission standards. These two systems ensure compliance with the diesel emissions requirements; at the same time, they ensure fuelefficiency, handling, torque and power. For messages and system warnings, refer to the "Warning lights and messages" paragraph in the "Knowing the instrument panel" chapter. AdBlue® (UREA) is considered a very stable product with a long shelf life. Stored at temperatures LOWER than 32 °C, it has a shelf life of at least one year. For more information on the AdBlue® (UREA) liquid type, see the “Fluids and lubricants” paragraph in the “Technical specifications” chapter. The vehicle is provided with an automatic AdBlue® (UREA) heating system when the engine starts allowing the system to work correctly at temperatures lower than -11 °C. IMPORTANT! AdBlue® (UREA) freezes at temperatures lower than -11 °C. 141 STARTING AND DRIVING 142 VERSION WITH METHANE SYSTEM (Natural Power) WARNING If gas is smelled, switch from methane operation to petrol operation and immediately go to a Fiat Dealership to have the vehicle checked and possible system faults excluded. 44) 45) INTRODUCTION The "Natural Power" version of the Fiat Ducato features two fuel system, one primary natural gas (methane) system and one emergency petrol system. METHANE CYLINDERS The vehicle is equipped with five cylinders (total capacity of about 218 litres) located under the vehicle floor and protected by two special shields. The cylinders are the tank that contains the methane in its compressed gaseous state (nominal pressure of 200 bar at 15°C). The methane, stored in the canisters at high pressure, flows through a dedicated pipe to reach the pressure regulator/reduction unit which supplies the 4 methane injectors at low pressure (about 6 bar). The cylinders must be inspected, in accordance with ECE Regulation Procedure no. 110, every 4 years from the vehicle registration date or in accordance with specific regulations in individual countries. FUEL SWITCHING LOGICS Management of switching between the two different fuel supplies is fully automatic, and carried out by the engine control unit. When the residual amount of methane drops below 1/5 of the cylinder capacity, the lowest level and the edges of the other levels flash to indicate the reserve state and that refuelling fig. 150 is required. If the methane runs out, it is automatically switched to petrol; on the display, all the empty segments stop near flashing and then the indicator the CNG icon fig. 151 turns on. Having reached the reserve methane pressure threshold, and completely filled the methane tank, the system forces the switch to petrol for 5 seconds, with the aim of keeping the petrol fuel supply system fully efficient. 150 F1A0436 151 F0N0403i The general recommendation is to avoid emptying the petrol tank completely, as this may lead to a risk for the driver: After the METHANE level has dropped below the reserve threshold, the vehicle will continue to run on petrol until it runs out; the vehicle has run out of petrol during a previous mission and while running on METHANE it has reached the METHANE reserve pressure threshold: in this case, the system forces switching to petrol and the vehicle turns off while it is in motion. NOTE Make sure that the key is in the OFF position when refuelling with methane. If, in fact, the system has already forced running on petrol and you refuel with methane with the key in the ON position, the engine will continue running on petrol until the next time it is started. RESTRICTIONS ON USE Passing from running on methane to running on petrol causes the maximum speed to be limited to 90 km/h; therefore, after the first methane reserve indication, it is advisable to refuel and after the second indication of gaseous fuel running out (double beep), avoid "risky" conditions such as overtaking at high speed on the motorway. Petrol operation is for emergency only. In order to guarantee good independence, even where there is limited tank capacity, performance is limited such as speed or, as for takeoff, acceleration (particularly uphill). As such, before embarking on demanding journeys and/or routes, in terms of load or road conditions, it is advisable to ensure that the gaseous fuel canister is full. IMPORTANT 44) Fiat Ducato Natural Power is equipped with a high pressure methane system designed to run at 200 bar. It is dangerous to strain the system with higher pressures. If there is a problem with the methane system, only contact a Fiat Dealership. Do not alter the methane system configuration or components; they are designed exclusively for the Fiat Ducato Natural Power. The use of other components or materials could cause malfunctions and prejudice safety. 45) When oven painting, the cylinders must be removed from the vehicle and refitted by a Fiat Dealership. Although the methane system has numerous safety features, it is advisable to close the manual tap on the cylinders whenever the vehicle is not in use for a long period, transported on other vehicles or moved in an emergency as a result of a breakdown or accident. LOADING ADVICE The Fiat Ducato version used by you has been designed and type approved on the basis of certain maximum weights (see "Weights" table in the "Technical Data" chapter): kerb weight, payload, total weight, maximum weight on front axle, maximum weight on rear axle, towable weight. WARNING The maximum permitted load on the floor fastenings is 500 kg; the maximum permitted load on the side panel is 150 kg. WARNING For versions with right and left side flaps, it is advisable to reposition the release lever in the closed position before lowering the sides. 149) 150) 151) 46) In addition to these general precautions, some simple precautions can improve driving safety, travelling comfort and vehicle durability: distribute the load evenly over the platform: if it is necessary to concentrate it in a single area, choose an area mid-way between both axles; 143 STARTING AND DRIVING lastly, remember that the dynamic behaviour of the vehicle is affected by the weight transported: in particular, the stopping distances are longer, especially at high speed. WARNING 149) Irregular trajectories and abrupt braking may cause sudden movements of the load with consequent situations of hazard for the driver and passengers. Before beginning your journey, please constrain the load appropriately, using the hooks provided on the floor. To hold it in place, use cables, ropes or belts that are appropriately strong to hold the weight of the material to be fixed. 150) Even when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill or side slope, opening the rear or side doors could cause unsecured goods to fall out. 151) If you wish to carry a reserve of petrol in a can, observe the legal restrictions and only use a can that is type-approved and properly secured to the load anchoring eyebolts. In the event of a collision the fire risk is increased all the same. IMPORTANT 46) Each of these must be strictly observed and MUST NEVER BE EXCEEDED in any case. In particular, ensure that you never exceed the maximum permitted weights on the front and rear axles when arranging the load 144 on the vehicle (particularly if the vehicle is equipped with a specific trim level). TOWING TRAILERS IMPORTANT NOTES The vehicle must be provided with a type-approved tow hook and adequate electrical system to tow caravans or trailers. Installation should be carried out by specialised personnel who will issue the required papers for travelling on roads. Install any specific and/or additional door mirrors as specified by the Highway Code. Remember that when towing a trailer, steep hills are harder to climb, the braking spaces increase and overtaking takes longer depending on the overall weight. Engage a low gear when driving downhill, rather than constantly using the brake. The weight of the trailer on the vehicle tow hook will reduce the loading capacity of the vehicle by the same amount. Consider the weight of the trailer fully laden, including accessories and luggage, to make sure you do not exceed the maximum towable weight (shown on the vehicle registration document). Do not exceed the speed limits specific to each country you are driving in, in the case of vehicles towing trailers. In any case, the top speed must not exceed 100 km/h. You are advised to fit a suitable stabiliser to the trailer drawbar. In the vehicles equipped with parking sensors, after fitting the tow hook malfunctioning warnings may be displayed, as some parts (tow bar, ball tow hook) may be within the sensor detection range. In this case the detection range must be adjusted or the parking assistance function must be deactivated. 152) 153) INSTALLING THE TOW HOOK The towing device should be fastened to the body by specialised technicians according to any additional and/or integrative information supplied by the Manufacturer of the device. The towing device must meet current regulations with reference to Directive 94/20/EC and subsequent amendments. For any version the towing device used must match the towable weight of the vehicle on which it is to be installed. For the electric connection a standard connector should be used which is generally placed on a special bracket normally fastened to the towing device, and a special ECU for external trailer light control must be installed on the vehicle. For the electrical connection, 7 or 13 pin 12 VDC connections are to be used (CUNA/UNI and ISO/DIN Standards). Follow the instructions provided by the vehicle manufacturer and/or the tow hitch manufacturer. An electric brake should be supplied directly by the battery through a cable with a cross section of no less than 2,5 mm². WARNING Electric brakes or other devices must be used with engine running. In addition to the electrical branches, the electric system of the vehicle can only be connected to the supply cable for an electric brake and to the cable for an internal light, though not above 15W. For connections use the preset control unit with battery cable no less than 2.5 mm². WARNING The trailer tow hook contributes to the length of the vehicle. When installing on long wheelbase versions, it is only possible to install removable tow hooks because the total vehicle length limit of 6 metres is exceeded. If no trailer is fitted, the hook must be removed from the attachment base and it must not exceed the original length of the vehicle. WARNING If you wish to leave the tow hook fitted without towing a trailer, it is advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership for the relevant system update operations because the tow hook could be detected as an obstacle by the central sensors. Installation diagram for Van versions fig. 152 The tow hook structure must be fastened in the points shown by the symbol Ø using a total of 6 M10x1.25 screws and 4 M12 screws. The internal back plates must be at least 5 mm thick. MAX LOAD ON BALL: 100/120 kg according to the payload (see “Weights” table in the “Technical data” chapter). The structure Ø must be fixed in the points indicated using a total of 6 M10x1.25 screws and 4 M12 screws. MAX LOAD ON BALL: 100/120 kg according to the payload (see “Weights” table in the “Technical data” chapter). WARNING 152) The ABS with which the vehicle may be equipped will not control the braking system of the trailer. Particular caution is required on slippery roads. 153) Never modify the braking system of the vehicle to control the trailer brake. The trailer braking system must be fully independent from the hydraulic system of the vehicle. 154) After fitting, screw holes must be sealed to prevent exhaust gas infiltrations. 154) To install a tow hook, the bumpers must be trimmed as described in the supplier's installation kit. Installation diagram for Truck and Chassis Cab versions fig. 153 Another tow hook specific to Truck and Chassis Cab versions is shown in fig. 153. 145 M12 152 146 F1A0164 STARTING AND DRIVING 153 F1A0165 147 STARTING AND DRIVING 148 INSTRUCTIONS FOR USING THE REMOVABLE BALL HEAD TOW BAR 47) 48) 49) 50) 51) 52) Before setting off, check the correct locking of the removable ball head tow bar, as follows: The green mark of the flywheel must coincide with the green mark on the tow bar. The flywheel is in the stop position on the tow bar (without slot). Locked lock and key removed. The flywheel cannot be removed. Ball head bar firmly secured to the housing pipe. Check by shaking with a hand. The fitting procedure must be repeated if any of the 4 checked requirements is not met. If even only one of the requirements is not met the tow hook must not be used, as in this case there is risk of accidents. Contact the joint manufacturer. The ball head tow bar can be fitted and removed manually, without needing any tool. Never use working tools or means, as the mechanism could be damaged. Never unlock in the case of trailer attached to the vehicle or fitted rack. When driving without trailer or rack the ball head tow bar must be removed and the closing plug must always be inserted in the housing pipe. This applies particularly if the visibility of the number plate characters or of the lighting system is reduced. 156 154 F1A0380 Locked position, driving fig. 155 155 F1A0381 Released position, removed fig. 156 F1A0382 Removable ball head tow bar fig. 154 - fig. 155 - fig. 156 (1) Mounting pipe - (2) Ball head tow bar - (3) Locking balls - (42) Release lever - (5) Handwheel - (6) Cap - (7) Wrench - (82) Red mark (handwheel) - (9) Green mark (handwheel) - (10) Green mark (tow bar) - (11) Symbol (release control) - (12) Closing plug - (13) Coupling pin - (14) No gaps between 2 and 5 - (15) Gap of about 5 mm Installing the ball head tow bar 1. Remove the plug from the mounting pipe. The ball head tow bar is usually in the released position when taken out from the boot. This can be observed by the flywheel spaced from the tow bar, corresponding to a slot of approx. 5 mm (see fig. 155) and by the red mark on the flywheel directed to the green mark on the tow bar. Please note that the tow bar can be installed only when in these conditions. If the locking mechanism of the tow bar is disengaged before the installation, or at any other time, and is in the locked position, it must be pre-loaded. The locked position can be identified by the green mark of the flywheel coinciding with the green mark of the tow bar and by the flywheel in the stop position on the tow bar, namely without slot (see fig. 155). The locking mechanism is pre-loaded as follows: with the key inserted and the lock open, extract the flywheel following the direction of the arrow (a) and, to pre-load, rotate according to the direction of the arrow (b) until the stop. The release lever is engaged and the locking mechanism remains in the pre-loading position even when the flywheel is released. The tow bar must be inserted in the housing pipe with the coupling pin for the installation. Insert from the bottom and push upwards. The mechanism then locks automatically. Keep your hands far from the flywheel, as it rotates during the locking procedure. 2. The tow bar must be inserted in the housing pipe with the coupling pin for the installation. Insert from the bottom and push upwards. The mechanism then locks automatically. Keep your hands far from the flywheel, as it rotates during the locking procedure. 3. Close the lock and always remove the key. The key cannot be removed when the lock is released. Apply the protection cap on the lock. Removing the tow bar 1. Remove the protection cap from the lock and press it on the key grip. Open the lock with the key. 2. Hold the tow bar firmly, remove the flywheel following the direction of the arrow and rotate according to the direction of the arrow b until stopping, so as to remove till the extracted position. Then remove the tow bar from the housing pipe. The flywheel can then be released; it autonomously stops in the released position. 3. Arrange the tow bar in the luggage compartment so that it cannot be dirtied or damaged by other transported objects. 4. Insert the suitable plug in the mounting pipe. 49) To ensure correct operation of the system, periodically remove all dirt deposits from the ball head bar and from the mounting pipe. The mechanical components must be serviced at the specified intervals. The lock must only be treated with graphite. 50) Periodically lubricate the joints, the sliding surfaces and the balls with grease without resin or oil. Lubrication is also a further corrosion protection. 51) If the vehicle is washed with highpressure jets, the ball head bar must be removed and the dedicated cap fitted. The ball head bar must never be treated with steam jets. 52) Two keys are supplied together with the removable ball tow bar. Note down the key number on the pawl for any following order and keep it. IMPORTANT 47) The removable ball head bar must be repaired and taken apart by the manufacturer only. 48) The accompanying plate must be in a highly visible point of the vehicle, near the mounting pipe or inside the boot. 149 STARTING AND DRIVING 150 VEHICLE INACTIVITY If the vehicle needs to be off the road for longer than one month, the following precautions must be taken: park the vehicle indoors in a dry and, if possible, well-ventilated place; engage a gear; check that the handbrake is not engaged; disconnect the negative battery terminal; if the vehicle is equipped with a battery disconnection function (disconnector), see the description of the procedure in the "Controls" paragraph in the "Knowing the vehicle" section; clean and protect the painted parts using protective wax; clean and protect the shiny metal parts using special compounds available commercially; sprinkle talcum powder on the windscreen and rear window wiper rubber blades and lift them off the glass; slightly open the windows; cover the vehicle with a piece of fabric or perforated plastic sheet. Do not use compact plastic tarpaulins, which prevent humidity from evaporating from the surface of the vehicle; inflate tyres to +0.5 bar above the standard prescribed pressure and check it periodically; do not drain the engine cooling system. WARNING If the vehicle is equipped with an alarm system, switch off the vehicle alarm with the remote control. WARNING After turning the ignition key to STOP and having closed the driver side door, wait at least one minute before disconnecting the electrical supply from the battery. When reconnecting the electrical supply to the battery, make sure that the ignition key is in the STOP position and the driver side door is closed. IN AN EMERGENCY A punctured tyre or a burnt-out bulb? At times, a problem may interfere with our journey. The pages on emergencies can help you to deal with critical situations independently and with calm. In an emergency we recommend that you call the freephone number found in the Warranty Booklet. The www.fiatprofessional.com, website, or www.fiatcamper.com, for motorhome owners, provides information about the nearest Fiat Service Network together with a great deal of other useful information. REPLACING A BULB .................. REPLACING AN EXTERIOR BULB ....................................... REPLACING INTERIOR BULBS .... REPLACING FUSES ................... GATEWAY FMS MODULE ........... CHANGING A WHEEL ................ FIX & GO AUTOMATIC QUICK TYRE REPAIR KIT ...................... EMERGENCY STARTING ............ BATTERY RECHARGING ............ FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH ............. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION GEAR LEVER RELEASE .............. KEY RELEASE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ........................ TOWING THE VEHICLE .............. 152 155 160 161 172 177 181 183 184 185 186 187 188 151 IN AN EMERGENCY REPLACING A BULB GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 155) 156) 53) When a light is not working, check that the corresponding fuse is intact before changing a bulb. For the location of fuses, refer to the paragraph "Replacing fuses" in this chapter. before changing a bulb check the contacts for oxidation; burnt bulbs must be replaced by others of the same type and power; always check the headlight beam direction after changing a bulb; WARNING A slight misting may appear on the internal surface of the headlight: this does not indicate a fault and is caused by low temperature and the degree of humidity in the air. Misting will rapidly disappear when the headlights are switched on. The presence of drops inside the headlights indicates infiltration of water. Contact a Fiat Dealership. 152 WARNING 155) Modifications or repairs to the electric system that are not carried out properly or do not take the system technical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire. 156) Halogen bulbs contain pressurised gas, in the case of breakage they may burst causing glass fragments to be projected outwards. IMPORTANT 53) Halogen bulbs must be handled holding the metallic part only. Touching the transparent part of the bulb with your fingers may reduce the intensity of the emitted light and even reduce the lifespan of the bulb. In the event of accidental contact, wipe the bulb with a cloth moistened with alcohol and let the bulb dry. BULB TYPES Various types of bulbs are fitted to your vehicle: All-glass bulb: (type A) these are pressure fitted - pull to remove. Bayonet bulb: (type B) to remove them press the bulb and turn it anticlockwise. Cylindrical bulbs: (type C) release them from their contacts to remove. Halogen bulbs: (type D) to remove the bulb, release it and extract it from its seat. Halogen bulbs: (type E) to remove the bulb, release it and extract it from its seat. 153 IN AN EMERGENCY Light bulbs Light bulbs Type Power Figure ref. Main beams H7 55W D Dipped headlights H7 55W D W21/5W - LED (*) – – H11 55W – WY21W 21W B W16WF (***) / WY5W (****) 16W (***) / 5W (****) A Rear direction indicators PY2IW 21W B Side lights W5W 5W A P21/5W 21/5W B Rear side lights/Brake lights P21W 21W B Third brake light W5W 5W B Reverse gear W16W 16W B Rear fog light W16W 16W B Number plate C5W 5W A Front roof light (movable lens) 12V10W 10W C Rear roof light 12V10W 10W C Front side lights / daytime running lights Front fog lights (**) Front direction indicators Side turn light Rear side lights (*) Where provided, instead of W21/5W bulb (**) For versions/markets where provided (***) XL and Tempo Libero versions (****) All other versions 154 REPLACING AN EXTERIOR BULB FRONT LIGHT CLUSTERS To remove the headlight, operate as follows: open the bonnet by following the procedure in the "Bonnet/Luggage Compartment" paragraph in the "Knowing your vehicle" chapter; disconnect the electrical connector (A) fig. 157 from the headlight; undo the screws (B) fig. 158 fixing the headlight to the body, release the headlight from its housing, in the lower part, as shown in fig. 158 and remove the headlight placing it on a work surface; follow the steps described below for replacing the bulbs; after the replacement, refit the headlight and secure it with the fixing screws (B) fig. 158; disconnect the electrical connector (A) fig. 157 from the headlight. 157 158 F1A0337 F1A0338 The bulbs are arranged inside the light cluster as follows fig. 159: (A) direction indicators (B) dipped beam headlights (C) main beam headlights (D) daytime running lights E side lights/DRLs with LEDs (as an alternative to (D)) 159 F1A0313 To replace a main beam headlight bulb, remove the rubber cap (C) fig. 160. To replace a dipped beam headlight bulb, remove the rubber cap (B) fig. 160. To replace a direction indicator or side light/DRL bulb (when not LED), remove the rubber cap (A) fig. 160. After replacement, refit the rubber caps correctly, ensuring that they are locked in place. 160 F1A0314 155 IN AN EMERGENCY SIDE LIGHTS/DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (LEDs) These are LEDs. For replacement, contact a Fiat Dealership. SIDE LIGHTS/DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: remove the protective rubber cover (A) fig. 160; turn the bulb holder (B) fig. 161 anticlockwise; extract the bulb by pulling and replace it; remove the bulb by pushing it slightly and turning it anticlockwise (bayonet mount); refit the bulb holder (B) by turning it clockwise and making sure that it locks correctly; refit the protective rubber cover (A) fig. 160. 161 156 F1A0386 MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS 162 DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS With incandescent bulbs F1A0315 To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: remove the protective rubber cover (C) fig. 160; free the bulb holder (A) fig. 150 from the side clips B and remove it; disconnect the electrical connector; fit the new bulb, ensuring that the outline of the metal part coincides with the grooves on the curve of the headlight, pressing to engage it with the side clips; reconnect the electrical connector; refit the protective rubber cover (C) fig. 160. 163 F1A0316 To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: remove the protective rubber cover (B) fig. 160; free the bulb holder (A) fig. 163 from the side clips (B) and remove it; disconnect the electrical connector; fit the new bulb, ensuring that the outline of the metal part coincides with the grooves on the curve of the headlight, pressing to engage it with the side clips; reconnect the electrical connector; refit the protective rubber cover (B) fig. 160. DIRECTION INDICATORS To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: remove the protective rubber cover (A) fig. 160; turn the bulb holder (B) fig. 164 anticlockwise; extract the bulb by pulling and replace it; remove the bulb by pushing it slightly and turning it anticlockwise (bayonet mount); refit the bulb holder B by turning it clockwise and making sure that it locks correctly; refit the protective rubber cover (A) fig. 160. 164 F1A0317 Side To change the bulb, proceed as follows fig. 165: move the mirror manually to permit access to the two fixing screws (A); using the Phillips screwdriver provided, undo the screws and extract the bulb holder assembly, releasing it from the teeth; undo the bulb and replace bulb (B), turning it anticlockwise. 165 166 F1A0361 167 F1A0362 F1A0195 FOG LIGHTS (for versions/markets, where provided) To replace the front fog light bulbs, proceed as follows: steer the wheel completely inwards; undo the screw (A) and remove the flap (B) fig. 166; adjust the clip (C) fig. 167 and disconnect the electrical connector (D); turn and remove the bulb holder (E); release the bulb and replace it; refit the new bulb and carry out the procedure described previously in reverse. 157 IN AN EMERGENCY REAR LIGHT CLUSTERS 168 F1A0318 The bulbs are arranged inside the light cluster as follows fig. 168: (A) brake/side lights (B) sidelights (C) Direction indicators (D) reversing lights (E) rear fog lights To change the bulb, proceed as follows fig. 169, fig. 170: open the rear swing door; 158 169 F1A0319 undo the 7 fixing screws (A) of the plastic cover; undo the two fixing screws (B); extract the unit outwards and disconnect the electrical connector; unscrew the screws (C) using the screwdriver provided and remove the bulb holder; 170 F1A0320 remove the bulb to be replaced D, (E), (F) pushing it slightly and turning it anticlockwise (bayonet mount) and replace it; extract the bulb (G), (H) pulling it outwards; refit the bulb holder and tighten the screws (C); reconnect the electrical connector, correctly reposition the unit on the body of the vehicle and then tighten the fixing screws (B); refit the plastic cover fastening it with the 7 fixing screws (A). THIRD BRAKE LIGHTS NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS 172 174 For truck and chassis cab versions: F1A0204 F1A0206 To replace the bulb proceed as follows: operate in the point indicated by the arrow and remove the lens unit (A) fig. 174; change the bulb releasing it from the side contacts and making sure the new bulb is correctly fastened between the contacts; refit the snap-fitted lens unit. 171 F1A0200 Undo the four screws (H) fig. 171 and replace the bulbs: (I) bulb for rear fog light (L) bulb for reversing light (M) bulb for side light (N) bulb for brake light (O) direction indicator bulb. 173 F1A0205 To replace the bulb proceed as follows: undo the two fixing screws (A) fig. 172; extract the lens unit; press the tabs (B) fig. 173 together and remove the bulb holder; remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace. SIDE LIGHTS (for versions/markets, where provided) To replace the bulb proceed as follows: For extra-long van undo the two fixing screws (C) fig. 175 and remove the headlight; remove the bulb-holder (D) on the rear of the light cluster, turning through 1/4 turn; remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace. 159 IN AN EMERGENCY REPLACING INTERIOR BULBS For the type of bulb and relevant power rating, see “Replacing a bulb”. 175 F1A0207 For chassis cabs with platform remove the bulb-holder on the rear of the light cluster, turning through 1/4 turn; remove the snap-fitted bulb and replace. FRONT CEILING LIGHT To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows: operate in the point shown by the arrow and remove roof light (A) fig. 176; 176 F1A0208 open protective flap (B) fig. 177; replace the bulbs (C) fig. 177 by releasing them from the side contacts and making sure that the new bulbs are correctly secured between the contacts; 160 177 F1A0209 re-close the flap (B) fig. 177 and fasten the ceiling light (A) fig. 176 in its housing, making sure that it locks into place. LED LOAD COMPARTMENT COURTESY LIGHT (for versions/markets, where provided) Contact a Fiat Dealership for replacing an LED front ceiling light. REAR CEILING LIGHT To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows: operate in the points shown by the arrow and remove ceiling light (D) fig. 178; open protective flap (E) fig. 179; change the bulb (F) fig. 179 releasing it from the side contacts and making sure the new bulb is correctly fastened between the contacts; close the protective flap E fig. 179 and re-insert the roof light (D) fig. 178 in its housing, making sure that it locks into place. REPLACING FUSES DASHBOARD FUSEBOX GENERAL INFORMATION 157) 158) 159) 160) 54) 178 F1A0210 Fuses protect the electrical system: they intervene (blow) in the event of a failure or improper action on the system. Check the state of the corresponding fuse when a device does not work: the filament (A) fig. 180 should be intact. If it is not, replace the blown fuse with another with the same amperage (same colour). (B) intact fuse. (C) fuse with damaged filament. 181 179 F1A0211 180 F1A0214 To access the dashboard fusebox fig. 181, loosen the screws (A) fig. 182 and remove the cover. F1A0212 FUSE LOCATION The vehicle fuses are grouped in three control units located on the dashboard, passenger compartment right pillar and engine compartment. 161 IN AN EMERGENCY 182 F1A0213 ENGINE COMPARTMENT FUSEBOX – OPTIONAL WIRING MODULE To gain access to the fuse fig. 184 - fig. 185 - fig. 186, remove the protective cover fig. 183. slowly rotate the screw anticlockwise until resistance is encountered (do not overtighten); slowly release the screw; opening is indicated by the entire screw head coming out of its housing; remove the cover. To refit the cover proceed as follows: join the cover with the box correctly; fully tighten the captive screw using the dedicated Phillips screwdriver provided; slowly rotate the screw clockwise until resistance is encountered (do not overtighten); slowly release the screw; closure is indicated by the inset of the entire screw head in its housing. Engine compartment fusebox 184 183 F1A0334 Proceed as follows: fully tighten the captive screw using the dedicated Phillips screwdriver provided; 162 F1A0216 Wired module (2.3 120 HP - 140 HP - 160 HP - 180 HP Multijet with AdBlue®) 185 WARNING 157) Never replace a fuse with another with a higher amp rating; RISK OF FIRE. If a general protection fuse (MEGA-FUSE, MIDI-FUSE) is activated, contact a Fiat Dealership. 158) Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition key has been removed and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. 159) If the replaced fuse blows again, contact a Fiat Dealership. 160) Contact Fiat Dealership if a safety system (airbags, brakes), engine system (engine, transmission) or steering system general protection fuse blows. F1A0458-1 Optional wired module IMPORTANT 186 187 F1A0218 188 F1A0217 54) Never replace a faulty fuse with metal wires or anything else. F1A0455-1 RIGHT CENTRAL PILLAR OPTIONAL FUSEBOX (for versions/markets, where provided) To gain access to the fuse box fig. 187, remove the protective cover fig. 188. 163 IN AN EMERGENCY 164 Dashboard fusebox Protected device Fuse Ampere Right dipped beam headlight F12 7.5 Left dipped headlight F13 7.5 Engine compartment fusebox relay, dashboard control unit relay (+key) F31 5 Lighting of roof lights in the passenger compartment (+battery) F32 7.5 Battery monitoring sensor for Start&Stop versions (+battery) F33 7.5 Minibus interior lights (emergency) F34 7.5 Radio, Climate control system, Alarm, Tachograph, Battery disconnecting control unit, Webasto timer (+battery), TPMS, Current stabiliser for radio setup (S&S) F36 10 Brake lights control (main), Instrument panel (+key), Gateway (for transformers) F37 7.5 Door lock (+battery) F38 20 Windscreen wiper (+key) F43 20 Driver's side electric window F47 20 Passenger side electric window F48 20 Parking sensor control unit, radio, steering wheel controls, central control panel, left control panel, auxiliary panel, battery disconnecting control unit (+key), Trailer hook, Rain sensor, Current stabiliser (for S&S) F49 5 Climate control system, power steering control unit, reversing lights, Tachograph (+key), TOM TOM setup, Lane Departure Warning, Rear camera, Headlight alignment corrector F51 5 Instrument panel (+battery) F53 7.5 Protected device Fuse Ampere Not available F89 – Left main beam headlight F90 7.5 Right main beam headlight F91 7.5 Left fog light F92 7.5 Right fog light F93 7.5 165 IN AN EMERGENCY 2.3 120 HP - 140 HP - 160 HP - 180 HP Multijet versions with AdBlue® 189 F1A0472 TO: Engine compartment fusebox - B: Wired module - C: Optional wired module Protected device 166 Fuse Ampere Wired module B power (+battery) F05 50 Engine cooling high speed fan (+battery) F06 40/60 Engine cooling low speed fan (+battery) F07 40/50/60 Passenger compartment fan (+key) F08 40 Rear power socket (+battery) F09 15 Horn F10 15 Power socket (+battery) F14 15 Cigar lighter (+battery) F15 15 Protected device Fuse Ampere Air conditioning compressor F19 7.5 Windscreen wiper F20 30 Auxiliary control panel for mirror movement and folding (+key) F24 7.5 Mirror demisting F30 15 Webasto control unit F61 30 Passenger compartment fan with Webasto F62 20 Trailer hook socket F63 20 Headlight washers F64 30 Trailer control unit F65 15 Trailer control unit F66 15 Trailer hook socket F67 20 Empty F91 Empty Empty F92 Empty Self-levelling suspension F93 7.5 Empty F94 Empty SCR UREA (Urea control module) F95 15 SCR UREA (Urea sensors) F96 15 Automatic transmission control unit F97 15 Automatic transmission lever F98 5 167 IN AN EMERGENCY 3.0 140 Natural Power versions 190 F1A0490 TO: Engine compartment fusebox - B: Wired module (*) - C: Optional wired module Protected device 168 Fuse Ampere Engine cooling high speed fan (+battery) F06 40/60 Engine cooling low speed fan (+battery) F07 40/50 Passenger compartment fan (+key) F08 40 Rear power socket (+battery) F09 15 Horn F10 15 Power socket (+battery) F14 15 Cigar lighter (+battery) F15 15 Air conditioning compressor F19 7.5 Windscreen wiper F20 30 Protected device Fuse Ampere Auxiliary control panel for mirror movement and folding (+key) F24 7.5 Mirror demisting F30 15 Trailer hook socket F63 20 Headlight washers F64 30 Trailer control unit F65 15 Trailer control unit F66 15 Trailer hook socket F67 20 Methane tank valve (CNG) F68 10 Methane relay solenoid valves T51 30 (*) Not present on Natural Power versions, present only on versions with AdBlue® 169 IN AN EMERGENCY Right central pillar optional fusebox 191 Protected device 170 F1A0475 Fuse Ampere Engine intake / ventilation fan (MBUS) F54 15 Heated seats F55 15 Rear passenger power socket F56 15 Additional heater under the seat F57 10 Left heated rear window F58 15 Protected device Fuse Ampere Right heated rear window F59 15 Not available F60 – Not available F61 – Not available F62 – Additional passenger heater control F63 10 Not available F64 – Additional passenger heater fan F65 30 NOTE If the methane has run out, the control unit automatically manages the switch to running on petrol. 171 IN AN EMERGENCY 172 GATEWAY FMS MODULE The Gateway FMS Module provides the interface between the vehicle data network and the FMS standard. FMS: The Fleet Management Systems Interface (FMS) is a standard interface that allows the digital electronic control unit of the vehicle signals to be read. The information in these signals can be used to facilitate the personalisation or special outfitting of the vehicle. The Gateway FMS Module supports the following FMS Standard versions: FMS - Standard Interface description Vers. 02 (available on http://www.fmsstandard.com/Truck/index.htm) Bus FMS - Standard Interface description Vers. 02 (available on http://www.fmsstandard.com/Bus/index.htm) We advise having the Gateway FMS Module installed by the Fiat Dealership or specialist technicians. The fitting instructions are in the Fitters/Installers Manual on the HYPERLINK website "http://www.fiatprofessionalconverters.com" www.fiatprofessionalconverters.com. The following table shows all signals available to control units interfaced with the Gateway FMS Module. Message Signal Description Parking Brake Switch Indicates parking brake engaged Wheel based speed Indicates vehicle speed Clutch switch Indicates clutch pedal pressed Brake switch Indicates brake pedal pressed Cruise control active Indicates Cruise Control active Accelerator pedal position 1 Indicates accelerator pedal position Engine Percent Load At Current Speed Indicates percentage ratio between engine torque and maximum indicated torque at current engine speed LFC Engine total fuel used Indicates total fuel used during vehicle operation DD Fuel Level Indicates ratio of fuel volume to total tank volume EEC1 Engine speed Indicates engine speed VDHR High resolution total vehicle distance Indicates total vehicle distance travelled ET1 Engine coolant temperature Indicates temperature of engine coolant AMB Ambient Air Temperature Indicates temperature outside of vehicle Fuel Rate Indicates quantity of fuel used by engine per time unit Instantaneous Fuel Economy Indicates ratio between quantity of fuel used and current vehicle speed CCVS EEC2 LFE 173 IN AN EMERGENCY Message Description SERV Service distance Indicates distance that can be travelled by vehicle before scheduled servicing HOURS Total engine hours Indicates total engine operating time DC1 Position of doors Indicates current door status AS Alternator Status 1 Indicates current alternator status Selected Gear (1) Indicates next awaited gear Current Gear (1) Indicates current gear Minutes Indicates minutes Hours Indicates hours Month Indicates month Day Indicates day Year Indicates year High beam, main beam Indicates active main beam headlight status Low beam Indicates active dipped headlight status Turn signals Indicates active direction indicator status Hazard warning Indicates active hazard warning light status Parking Brake Indicates parking brake engaged Brake failure / brake system malfunction Indicates braking system fault Hatch open Indicates rear door not shut Fuel level Indicates fuel reserve warning light on ETC2 TD FMS1 (2) 174 Signal Message FMS1 (2) TC01 Signal Description Engine coolant temperature Indicates engine coolant overheating warning light on Battery charging condition Indicates insufficient battery charge warning light on Engine oil Indicates insufficient engine oil pressure warning light on Position lights, side lights Indicates active side light status Front fog lights Indicates active fog light status Rear fog light Indicates active rear fog light status Engine / Mil indicator Indicates EOBD/injection system failure warning light on Service, call for maintenance Indicates scheduled service indicator displayed Transmission failure / malfunction Indicates transmission system fault Anti-lock brake system failure Indicates ABS failure warning light on Worn brake linings Indicates brake pad wear warning light on Malfunction / general failure Indicates general failure warning light on Height Control (Levelling) Indicates self-levelling suspension indicator displayed Engine Emission system failure (MIL indicator) Indicates particulate filter blocked warning light on ESC indication Indicates stability control warning light on Tachogr. vehicle speed (3) Indicates vehicle speed stored by chronotachograph 175 IN AN EMERGENCY Message DC2 FMS (1) (2) (3) (4) 176 Signal Description Open Status Door 1 Indicates driver door status Open Status Door 2 Indicates passenger door status Open Status Door 3 (4) Indicates rear door(s) status Open Status Door 4 (4) Indicates sliding side door status Open Status Door 5 (4) Indicates sliding side door status Requests supported Indicates whether Gateway FMS Module can respond to requests from external FMS module Diagnostics supported Indicates whether Gateway FMS Module supports requests for sending diagnosis information FMS-standard SW - version supported Indicates the FMS Standard version supported by the Gateway FMS Module Available on vehicle versions with Comfort-Matic transmission The signal values are derived from information shown on the instrument panel The vehicle speed signal is still available even if there is no chronotachograph If the content is not present, the signal value transmitted is ‘closed’ CHANGING A WHEEL (E) - extension for spanner (F) - screwdriver grip (G) - screwdriver bit GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS Wheel replacement and correct use of the jack and spare wheel (for versions/markets, where provided) call for some precautions, which are listed below. 161) 162) 163) 164) 165) Please note that: the jack weight is 4.5 kg; the jack requires no adjustment; the jack cannot be repaired: in the event of a fault it must be replaced by another original one; no tool other than its cranking device may be fitted on the jack. 166) To change a wheel, proceed as follows: stop the vehicle in a position that is not dangerous for oncoming traffic where you can change the wheel safely. The ground must be flat and sufficiently compact; 192 F1A0168 switch off the engine and pull the handbrake; engage first gear or reverse; wear the reflective safety jacket (compulsory by law in certain countries) before getting out of the vehicle; indicate that the vehicle has broken down using the devices required by the law in the current country (e.g. warning triangle, hazard lights, etc.); in the event of a wheel change on a slope or on unsurfaced roads, put any object as stop under the wheels; take the tool bag under the passenger seat (see “Compartment under front passenger seat” in the “Know your vehicle” section). The container includes these tools: (A) - tow hook (B) - rod for spanner (C) - bolt spanner (D) - jack 193 F1A0420 if the tool container is not provided, for special trim versions, a bag containing the above tools may be provided; for versions with alloy rims, remove the press-fitted hub cap; take the extension for spanner, the bolt spanner and the rod for spanner from the tool container; with the tools assembled correctly, loosen the fixing bolts for the wheel to be changed by one turn; turn the ring nut to partly extend the jack; position the jack at the lifting support nearest the wheel to be replaced, at the points shown in fig. 192. For short wheelbase versions with retractable footboard, the jack must be positioned at the lift point shown in fig. 194 aligned 177 IN AN EMERGENCY (45°) so that it does not interfere with the retractable footboard; 195 194 F1A0169 warn all bystanders that the vehicle is about to be lifted. They must stay clear and not touch the vehicle until it is back on the ground. for versions equipped with selflevelling pneumatic suspension, before using the jack to raise the vehicle, press the buttons (A) and (B) fig. 195 simultaneously for at least 5 seconds. The operating mode for raising the vehicle is activated: the LEDs on the buttons come on constantly. To exit this mode, press buttons (A) and (B) simultaneously for another 5 seconds; both LEDs on the buttons will go out and full system operation will be restored. This mode deactivates automatically when the speed of approx. 5 km/h is exceeded. 167) 178 F1A0170 lift the vehicle. After lifting the vehicle: for all versions, access the rear right wheel arch, operate the screw (A) fig. 196 on the spare wheel retaining device, using the supplied wrench assembled correctly with the dedicated extension (B) fig. 196; turn the tool anticlockwise fig. 197 to allow the spare wheel to descend; continue turning anticlockwise until the stop point, indicated by the stiffening of the manoeuvre or a click from the clutch present in the device; 168) 169) 196 F1A0171 after unwinding the whole cable of the spare wheel lifting device, remove the wheel from the vehicle; 197 F1A0421 undo the retaining knob (D) fig. 198 and free the wheel by sliding out the support (E). supported in its housing beneath the floor pan (D) fig. 197. 170) 198 F1A0174 with the tools assembled, undo the bolts fig. 199 fully and remove the wheel; fit the spare wheel, aligning holes (G) fig. 200 with the pins (H). When fitting the spare wheel, ensure that the wheel support surfaces are clean and free of impurities that could later cause the bolts to loosen; screw in the 5 fastening bolts; assemble the tools to tighten the bolts fully, passing alternately from one bolt to the diagonally opposite one, following the scheme shown in fig. 200; use the wheel removal wrench to lower the vehicle and remove the jack; 199 F1A0422 At the end of the operation: take the replaced wheel, reattach it to the support (E) fig. 198 and tighten the knob (D); H G 200 F1A0176 introduce the assembly tool fig. 197 provided with the suitable extension (B) fig. 196 on the screw (A) fig. 196 of the spare wheel housing manoeuvring device and turn clockwise 2 to lift the spare wheel back up until it is fully 201 F1A0430 For vehicles with alloy rims, proceed as follows: carry out the above described operations for changing the wheel until loading the punctured wheel on the spare wheel lifting device; take the kit from the tool bag, located in the glove compartment; the kit includes one bracket, three special screws and one Allen spanner, 10 size; go to the rear side of the vehicle where the spare wheel is located; make sure that all of the cable for the spare wheel lifting device has been unrolled, grip the bell and position it inside the circular bracket fig. 202; 179 IN AN EMERGENCY 202 F1A0424 tighten the knob onto the screw to secure the bracket fig. 203. 203 F1A0426 use the Allen key to tighten the three special screws on the nuts of the bracket fig. 205 and secure the rim; F1A0425 rest the bracket on the inside of the alloy rim fig. 204. 180 204 205 F1A0385 introduce the assembly tool fig. 197 provided with the suitable extension (B) fig. 196 on the screw (A) fig. 196 of the spare wheel housing manoeuvring device and turn clockwise to lift the spare wheel back up until it is fully supported in its housing beneath the floor pan (D) fig. 199. check that the position of the replaced wheel under the platform is correct (the lifting system is equipped with a clutch to limit the end of the stroke, incorrect positioning may jeopardise safety); place the removal tools back in the tool bag / compartment; place the tool box / compartment in its housing under the passenger seat. 171) 172) WARNING 161) Use your hazard lights, warning triangle, etc. to show that your vehicle is stationary. Passengers should get out of the vehicle, particularly if it is heavily loaded, and wait for the wheel to be changed away from the traffic. Apply the handbrake. In the event of a wheel change on a slope or on unsurfaced roads, put any object as stop under the wheels. 162) The spare wheel supplied (for versions/markets, where provided) is specific for your vehicle. Therefore, it must not be used on other models. Do not use spare wheels of other models on your vehicle. The wheel bolts are specific for your vehicle: do not use them on different models and do not use bolts from other models on your vehicle. 163) Repair and refit the standard wheel as soon as possible. Do not apply grease to the bolt threads before fitting: they could come unscrewed. 164) Use the jack only to replace wheels on the vehicle with which it is supplied or on other cars of the same model. Never use the jack for other purposes, such as lifting other vehicle models. Never use the jack to carry out repairs under the vehicle. Incorrect positioning of the jack may cause the lifted vehicle to fall. Do not use the jack for loads higher than the one shown on its label. 165) Never tamper with the inflation valve. Never introduce tools of any kind between rim and tyre. Check tyre and spare wheel pressure regularly, referring to the values shown in the "Technical specifications" section. 166) No tools other than the crank provided should be used with the spare wheel lifting device; it should be operated by hand only. 167) On versions equipped with self-levelling air suspension, never introduce the head or hands in the wheel arch. The vehicle could raise or lower automatically depending on possible load or temperature changes. 168) The device should only be operated by hand, without using any type of tool other than the crank provided like pneumatic or electrical screwdrivers. 169) The moving components of the jack (screws and joints) can also cause injuries: avoid touching them. If you come into contact with lubricating grease, clean yourself thoroughly. 170) At the end of the operation of raising/locking the spare wheel, after having checked the correct positioning of the wheel under the platform (yellow notch inside the window on the device), the spanner must be extracted, taking care not to turn it in the wrong direction (as in the figure) to facilitate the extraction of the spanner itself, to prevent the attachment device from being released and the wheel assembly not being securely retained. 171) Each time the spare wheel is moved, check that it is correctly positioned in its housing under the platform. If it is not correctly positioned, this could adversely affect safety. 172) The spare wheel lifting device is equipped with a clutch safety system for its own protection; this could activated if an excessive load is applied on the manoeuvring screw. FIX & GO AUTOMATIC QUICK TYRE REPAIR KIT (for versions/markets, where provided) The Fix & Go Automatic tyre repair kit is positioned at the front of the vehicle passenger compartment and includes fig. 206: 206 F1A0180 a spray can (A) of liquid sealant, complete with: clear filler hose (B); black pressure top-up hose (E); sticker (C) marked "max. 80 km/h", to be affixed in a position in clear view of the driver (on the instrument panel) after the tyre has been repaired; information leaflet (see fig. 207), to be used for prompt and correct use of the quick tyre repair kit and then to be handed to the personnel charged with handling the tyre treated with the tyre repair kit; compressor (D) complete with pressure gauge and connectors; a pair of protective gloves located in the side compartment of the compressor; adaptors for inflating different elements. 173) 174) 175) 55) 181 IN AN EMERGENCY pressure" paragraph in the "Technical specifications" section; 207 F1A0181 IMPORTANT INFORMATION: The sealing fluid of the quick repair kit is effective at external temperatures of between –20 °C and +50 °C. The sealing fluid has an expiry date. 176) 177) 208 F1A0182 For a more accurate reading, it is advisable to check the pressure on the pressure gauge (F) fig. 209 with the compressor off and without moving the centre selector from the repair position; the vehicle forwards by about 10 metres in order to distribute the sealing fluid inside the tyre evenly, then repeat the inflation operation; if after this operation it is still impossible after 10 minutes to reach at least 3 bar, do not start driving since the tyre is excessively damaged and the quick tyre repair kit cannot guarantee proper hold, contact a Fiat Dealership; if the tyre has been inflated to the recommended pressure in the “Inflation pressure" paragraph; 4) INFLATION PROCEDURE 178) 179) 180) 181) 182) Pull the handbrake. Unscrew the tyre valve cap, take out the filler hose (A)fig. 208and screw the ring nut (B)onto the tyre valve; insert the plug (E) fig. 210 in the nearest 12V power socket and start the engine. Turn the selector (D) fig. 209 anticlockwise to the repair position. Activate the kit by pressing the on/off switch. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in the "Inflation 182 210 209 F1A0183 if after 10 minutes it is still impossible to reach at least 3 bar, release the transparent filler pipe from the valve and take out the 12 V plug, then move F1A0335 after having driven for about 10 minutes, stop and re-check the tyre pressure; remember to engage the handbrake; if a pressure value of at least 3 bar is detected, restore the correct pressure prescribed in the “Inflation pressure" paragraph (with the engine running and the handbrake engaged), resume driving and drive with care to nearest Fiat Dealership. WARNING 173) Give the leaflet to the personnel charged with handling the tyre treated with the tyre repair kit. 174) Punctures on the sides of the tire may not be repaired. Do not attempt to use the quick repair kit if the tyre was damaged as a result of being used when underinflated. 175) Repairs are not possible in the case of damage to the wheel rim (bad groove distortion causing air loss). Do not remove the foreign body (screws or nails) from the tyre. 176) Never operate the compressor for longer than 20 consecutive minutes. Risk of overheating. Tyres repaired with the quick tyre repair kit must only be used temporarily, as the kit is not suitable for a definitive repair. 177) The bottle contains ethylene glycol. It contains latex that might cause allergic reactions. It is harmful if swallowed. Eye irritant. It may cause sensitisation if inhaled or on contact. Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. In the case of contact, wash immediately with plenty of water. In the event that it is swallowed, do not induce vomiting. Rinse out your mouth, drink large quantities of water and seek immediate medical attention. Keep out of the reach of children. The product must not be used by asthmatics. Do not inhale the vapours during insertion and suction. Call a doctor immediately if allergic reactions are noted. Store the bottle in its proper compartment, far from sources of heat. The sealing fluid has an expiry date. Replace the bottle if the sealant has expired. 178) Put on the protective gloves provided together with the quick tyre repair kit. 179) Apply the adhesive label where it can be easily seen by the driver as a reminder that the tyre has been treated with the quick repair kit. Drive carefully, particularly on bends. Do not exceed 80 km/h. Avoid sudden acceleration or braking. 180) If the pressure falls below 3 bar, do not drive any further: the Fix & Go automatic quick tyre repair kit cannot guarantee suitable sealing because the tyre is too damaged. Contact a Fiat Dealership. 181) Always indicate that the tyre was repaired using the quick tyre repair kit. Give the leaflet to the personnel charged with handling the tyre treated with the tyre repair kit. 182) If different tyres from the ones supplied with the vehicle are used, it may not be possible to carry out the repair. If the tyres are replaced, it is advisable to use those approved by the manufacturer. Consult a Fiat Dealership. IMPORTANT 4) Replace the bottle if the sealant has expired. Dispose of the bottle and the sealant properly. Have them disposed of in compliance with national and local regulations. EMERGENCY STARTING Go to a Fiat Dealership immediately if comes on steady on warning light the instrument panel. JUMP STARTING If the battery is flat, it is possible to start the engine using an auxiliary battery with the same capacity or a little higher than the flat one. It is advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership to check/replace the battery. 183) IMPORTANT 55) In the event of a puncture caused by foreign bodies, the kit may be used to repair tyres showing damage on the tread or shoulder up to max. 4 mm diameter. 211 F1A0351 183 IN AN EMERGENCY Proceed as follows to start the vehicle: lift the flap (A) fig. 211 to access the positive battery terminal connection. connect the positive terminals (+ mark near the terminal) of the two batteries using a suitable cable; use a second lead to connect the negative terminal (–) of the auxiliary battery to the earth point as shown in fig. 212; start the engine; when the engine has been started, remove the cables reversing the order above. vehicle, avoid any metal parts on the latter and the vehicle with the flat battery from accidentally coming into contact. BUMP STARTING Never bump start the engine by pushing, towing or driving downhill. This could cause fuel to flow into the catalytic converter and damage it beyond repair. WARNING 183) This starting procedure must be performed by expert personnel because incorrect actions could cause electrical discharge of considerable intensity. Furthermore, battery fluid is poisonous and corrosive: avoid contact with skin and eyes. Keep naked flames and lighted cigarettes away from the battery and do not cause sparks. 212 F1A0352 If after a few attempts the engine does not start, do not persist but contact the nearest Fiat Dealership. WARNING Do not directly connect the negative terminals of the two batteries: sparks could ignite explosive gas released from the battery. If the auxiliary battery is installed on another 184 BATTERY RECHARGING WARNING The battery recharging procedure is given as information only. To carry out this operation contact a Fiat Dealership. WARNING After setting the ignition device to STOP and having closed the driver side door, wait at least one minute before disconnecting the electrical supply from the battery. When reconnecting the electrical supply to the battery, make sure that the ignition device is in the STOP position and the driver side door is closed. WARNING Charging should be slow at a low ampere rating for approximately 24 hours. Charging for a longer time may damage the battery. WARNING The cables of the electrical system must be correctly reconnected to the battery, i.e. the positive cable (+) to the positive terminal and the negative cable (–) to the negative terminal. The battery terminals are marked with the positive (+) and negative (–) symbols, and are shown on the battery cover. The battery terminals must also be corrosion-free and firmly secured to the terminals. If a "quick- type" battery charger is used with the battery fitted on the vehicle, disconnect both battery leads before connecting it. Do not use a "quick-type" battery charger to provide the starting voltage. turn on the charger; at the end of the charging process, switch the battery charger off; after having disconnected the battery charger, reconnect connector (A) to the sensor (C) as shown fig. 213. 184) 185) VERSIONS WITHOUT START&STOP SYSTEM To recharge, proceed as follows: disconnect the terminal from the negative battery pole; connect the charger cables to the battery terminals, observing the polarity; turn on the battery charger; when it is recharged, turn the charger off before disconnecting it from the battery; reconnect the terminal to the negative battery pole. VERSIONS WITH START&STOP SYSTEM To recharge, proceed as follows: disconnect the connector (A) (pressing the button (B)) from the sensor (C) monitoring the battery conditions, on the negative pole (D) of the battery; connect the positive cable of the battery charger to the positive battery terminal (E) and the negative cable (F) to sensor terminal as shown in fig. 213; 213 F1A0219 WARNING 184) Battery fluid is poisonous and corrosive: avoid contact with your skin and eyes. The battery should be charged in a well ventilated place, away from naked flames or possible sources of sparks: danger of explosion and fire. 185) Do not attempt to recharge a frozen battery: first it must be thawed, otherwise there is a risk of explosion. If freezing has occurred, the battery should be checked by specialised technicians to make sure that the internal elements are not damaged and that the body is not cracked, with the risk of leaking poisonous and corrosive acid. FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH The vehicle is fitted with a safety switch that, in the event of a crash, comes into operation by cutting off the fuel supply and turning off the engine as a consequence. When the inertia switch cuts in, it cuts off the fuel supply and also activates the hazard warning lights, side lights and courtesy lights while releasing all the doors and displaying the relevant message; they are deactivated by pressing button (A). In the versions where provided, there is also a safety relay that activates in the event of impact to cut off the electrical supply. In this way, fuel wastage is prevented following breakage of the lines and also the formation of electrical sparks or discharges after damage to the vehicle electrical components. 186) 187) WARNING After an accident, remember to remove the key from the ignition device to avoid draining the battery. If no fuel leaks or damage to electrical devices of the vehicle (e.g. headlights) are detected after the impact and the vehicle is able to set off again, reactivate the automatic fuel cut-off switch. 185 IN AN EMERGENCY Restoring the fuel cut-off switch Press the button to reactivate the fuel cut-off switch (A) fig. 214. 214 F1A0086 WARNING 186) If, after a crash, you smell fuel or notice leaks from the fuel supply system, do not reset the switch to avoid fire risk. 187) Before reactivating the fuel cut-off switch, carefully check for fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g. headlights). 186 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION GEAR LEVER RELEASE In the event of a failure, to move the gear lever from P (Park), proceed as follows: turn off the engine and apply the parking brake; lift the gaiter upwards and release the trim from the dashboard fig. 215 to access button (A). press and hold down the brake pedal fully; press and hold down the release button (A), bringing the gear lever to the N (neutral) position; refit the gear lever trim correctly. 215 F1A0468 KEY RELEASE AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 56) The ignition key (for versions with key without remote control) can be removed only if the gear lever is in position P (Park). If the vehicle battery is flat and the ignition key is engaged, the latter is locked in position. To remove the key manually, proceed as follows: stop the vehicle in safe conditions, engage a gear and the electric parking brake; using the key (A) fig. 216provided (located in the container with the vehicle documents), undo the fixing screws (B) fig. 217 of the lower trim (C); 217 F1B0756 remove the lower steering column trim (C) releasing it from its housing; pull tab (D) fig. 218 downwards using one hand and with the other one remove the key, sliding it outwards; 218 F1A0469 once the key has been removed, refit the lower trim (C) fig. 217, make sure it locks correctly and fully tighten the fixing screws (B). IMPORTANT 216 F1A0477 56) It is advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership to have the refitting procedure carried out. If you would like to proceed autonomously, special attention must be paid to the correct coupling of the 187 IN AN EMERGENCY retaining clips. Otherwise, noise might be heard due to an incorrect fastening of the lower cover with the upper cover. TOWING THE VEHICLE 188) 189) 190) 191) 192) 193) 194) 195) 196) The vehicle is equipped with two rings for attaching the tow hook. 221 F1A0344 The front ring is located in the tool box beneath the passenger side seat. On versions with Fix&Go kit and without spare wheel, the tool box is available only on request for versions/markets where provided. 219 Open the flap (A) and remove it as shown in fig. 219; turn the lock knob (B) fig. 219 anticlockwise and remove it to allow the compartment fig. 220 to be removed; take the screwdriver provided from the box and prise up at the point shown to raise the cap (C) fig. 222; take the tow ring (D) from the box and screw onto the threaded pin fig. 222. The rear ring (B) fig. 223 is located at the point shown in the figure. F1A0221 223 222 220 188 F1A0222 F1A0223 In the absence of the tool box the vehicle front tow hook is housed in the on-board documentation container, together with the Owner Handbook. To use it, proceed as follows: VERSIONS WITH AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Vehicles with AT9 automatic transmission cannot be towed. F1A0224 WARNING 188) Screw on the tow ring and check that it stops at the end of travel position. 189) Before towing, switch off the steering lock (see "Ignition switch" paragraph in the "Knowing your vehicle" chapter). 190) The power brakes and power steering will not operate while the vehicle is being towed. More effort on the brake pedal and steering wheel will therefore be required. 191) Do not use flexible cables when towing and avoid jerky movements. During towing operations, make sure that the fastened joint does not damage adjoining components. 192) When towing the vehicle, it is necessary to obey specific road regulations which relate both to the towing device as well as to the behaviour to adopt on the road. 193) Do not start the engine whilst the vehicle is being towed. 194) Towing must be made exclusively on roads/streets; the device must not be used to recover the vehicle if it got off the road. 195) Towing must not be used in order to get past significant obstacles on the road (e.g. heaps of snow or material on the road surface). 196) Towing must take place with the two vehicles (one towing, the other towed) aligned as much as possible. Towing by roadside assistance vehicles, too, must take place with the two vehicles aligned as much as possible. 189 MAINTENANCE AND CARE 190 MAINTENANCE AND CARE Correct maintenance permits the performance of the vehicle to be maintained over time, as well as limited running costs and safeguarding the efficiency of the safety systems. This chapter explains how. SCHEDULED SERVICING ........... REGULAR CHECKS ................... DEMANDING VEHICLE USE ........ SCHEDULED SERVICING PLAN ....................................... CHECKING LEVELS ................... AIR CLEANER/POLLEN FILTER ..................................... BATTERY.................................. WINDSCREEN WIPER ................ LIFTING THE VEHICLE................ WHEELS AND TYRES................. SNOW TYRES ........................... SNOW CHAINS ......................... BODYWORK ............................. INTERIOR ................................. RUBBER HOSES ....................... 191 191 191 193 199 204 205 206 207 207 208 209 209 210 211 SCHEDULED SERVICING Correct servicing is crucial for guaranteeing a long life for the vehicle under the best conditions. This is why Fiat has planned a series of checks and maintenance operations every 48,000 km depending on the engine version. It is, however, important to remember that scheduled servicing does not completely cover all the requirements of the vehicle: even in the initial period before 48,000 km, and then subsequently between one service and another, ordinary care is always required such as routine checks involving topping up fluid level, checking tyre pressures etc. WARNING Scheduled Servicing interventions are set out by the Manufacturer. Failure to have them carried out may invalidate the warranty. Scheduled Servicing can be carried out by any Fiat Dealership, at preestablished times. If during each operation, in addition to the ones scheduled, the need arises for further replacements or repairs, these may only be carried out with the express agreement of the Customer. WARNING It is advisable to inform a Fiat Dealership of any small operating irregularities without waiting for the next service. If your vehicle is used frequently for towing, the interval between service coupons must be reduced. REGULAR CHECKS Before long journeys, check and, if necessary, restore: engine coolant level; brake fluid level; control and top-up of level of AdBlue® (UREA) Diesel emissions additive (for versions/markets, where provided); windscreen washer fluid level; tyre inflation pressure and condition; operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, etc.); operation of screen washer/wiper system and positioning/wear of windscreen/rear window wiper blades. To ensure that the vehicle is always efficient and well maintained, it is advisable to make sure that you carry out the above operations regularly (approximately every 1000 km and every 3000 km for checking and topping up engine oil is advisable). DEMANDING VEHICLE USE If the vehicle is mostly used in one of the following conditions: towing a trailer or caravan; dusty roads; short, repeated journeys (less than 7-8 Km) at sub-zero outdoor temperatures; engine often idling or driving long distances at low speeds or long periods of inactivity; the following checks must be carried out more often than indicated in the Service Schedule: check front disc brake pad condition and wear; check cleanliness of bonnet and luggage compartment locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage; visually inspect conditions of: engine, gearbox, transmission, pipes and hoses (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and rubber elements (gaiters/sleeves/bushes, etc.); check battery charge and battery fluid level (electrolyte); visually inspect conditions of the accessory drive belts; check and, if necessary, change engine oil and replace oil filter; restore level of AdBlue® (UREA) Diesel emissions additive (for 191 MAINTENANCE AND CARE 192 versions/markets, where applicable), when the warning light comes on or the message on the instrument panel appears; check and, if necessary, replace pollen filter. SCHEDULED SERVICING PLAN after reaching 144,000 km/6 years, the checks listed in the Scheduled Servicing Plan must be repeated cyclically starting from the first interval, thereby following the same intervals as before Thousands of miles 30 60 90 120 150 Thousands of kilometres 48 96 144 192 240 Years 2 4 6 8 10 Check battery charge status and possibly recharge Check tyre condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary; check the expiry date of the “Fix&Go Automatic” repair kit (for versions/markets, where provided) Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, boot, passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.) Check operation of the windscreen wiper/washer system and adjust jets, if necessary Check windscreen/rearscreen wiper blade position/wear (for markets/versions, where provided) Check cleanliness of bonnet and luggage compartment locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes), rubber elements (gaiters, sleeves, bushes, etc.) Check condition and wear of front disc brake pads and operation of pad wear indicator Check condition and wear of rear disc brake pads and operation of pad wear indicator (for versions/markets where provided) Check and fluid level top up, if required, in the engine compartment (1) (2) 193 MAINTENANCE AND CARE Thousands of miles 30 60 90 120 150 Thousands of kilometres 48 96 144 192 240 Years 2 4 6 8 10 Visual checking the conditions of the belt/and accessories command (for versions without automatic tensioner) Check tension of accessory drive belt (versions without automatic tensioner) (7) Inspect the conditions of toothed timing drive belt Check handbrake lever travel and adjust, if necessary Check exhaust emissions Use the diagnosis socket to check fuel/engine management system operation and engine oil decay (the latter for versions/markets, where provided) Check cleanliness of sliding side door lower guides for versions with S.S.D. (or every 6 months) Replace fuel filter cartridge Replace accessory drive belt/s Replace toothed timing drive belt (8) Replace the air cleaner cartridge (3) (4) 194 Change engine oil and replace oil filter (5) Change the brake fluid (6) Thousands of miles 30 60 90 120 150 Thousands of kilometres 48 96 144 192 240 Years 2 4 6 8 10 Replace the passenger compartment filter (1) Only ever use the fluids shown in the handbook for topping up, and only after checking that the system is intact. (2) Consumption of AdBlue® (UREA) emissions additive depends on the condition of use of the vehicle and is indicated by a warning light and message on the instrument panel (for versions/markets, where provided). (3) If the vehicle is equipped with an air cleaner specially for dusty areas: check and clean filter every 20,000 km, change filter every 40,000 km or change the air cleaner whenever the obstructed air cleaner indicator appears. (4) For versions with automatic transmission (AT9), If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, you are advised to change this filter every 24,000 km. (5) The actual interval for changing the oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signalled by the warning light or message (if present) on the instrument panel (see “Warning lights and messages" paragraph) and must never exceed 24 months. Change engine oil and oil filter every 12 months if the vehicle is driven mainly in towns. (6) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage. (7) When the engine oil is changed for the first time, check the tension of the auxiliary drive belt (8) Recommended maximum mileage 192,000 km. Irrespective of the mileage, the timing drive belt must be changed every 4 years for heavyduty use (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling) or at least every 5 years. (*) NOTE Change automatic transmission oil (AT9) and replace oil filter every 240,000 km. 195 MAINTENANCE AND CARE Natural Power versions Thousands of miles 25 50 75 100 125 Thousands of kilometres 40 80 120 160 200 Years 2 4 6 8 10 Check battery charge status and possibly recharge Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, boot, passenger compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.) Check operation of the windscreen wiper/washer system and adjust jets, if necessary Check the position/wear of the windscreen/rear window wiper blades Check cleanliness of bonnet and luggage compartment locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes), rubber elements (gaiters, sleeves, bushes, etc.) Visually inspect conditions and wear of front disc brake pads and operation of pad wear indicator Visually inspect condition and wear of rear disc brake pads and operation of pad wear indicator (for versions/markets, where provided) Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (engine coolant, hydraulic clutch/brakes, windscreen washer, battery, etc.) Visual checking the conditions of the belt/and accessories command (for versions without automatic tensioner) 196 Thousands of miles 25 50 75 100 125 Thousands of kilometres 40 80 120 160 200 Years 2 4 6 8 10 Check tension of accessory drive belt (versions without automatic tensioner) Check handbrake lever travel and adjust, if necessary Check exhaust emissions Check operation of engine management systems (using diagnosis socket) Check cleanliness of sliding side door lower guides for versions with S.S.D. (or every 6 months) Spark plug replacement Replace accessory drive belt/s Replace air cleaner cartridge (1) Replace engine oil and oil filter (2) Change the brake fluid (3) Replace the passenger compartment filter Visually inspect the condition of the methane pipes and fittings, methane tank fastening, possible restoration Check the pressure regulator and, if necessary, replace the internal filter Check operation and parameters of fuel supply system using self-diagnosis socket Check tightening torque of cylinder fastening bands Check pressure regulator heating piping seal 197 MAINTENANCE AND CARE 198 Thousands of miles 25 50 75 100 125 Thousands of kilometres 40 80 120 160 200 Years 2 4 6 8 10 Check correct assembly of injectors (positioning, clip effectiveness) Check electrical connections and engine wiring integrity (1) If the vehicle is equipped with an air filter specially for dusty areas: - every 20,000 km, check and clean the filter (2) If the vehicle annual mileage is less than 10,000 km, the engine oil and filter must be replaced every 12 months. (3) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage. CHECKING LEVELS 2.3 120 HP Multijet - 140 HP Multijet - 160 HP Multijet - 180 HP Multijet versions with AdBlue® 224 F1A0370 A. Engine oil filler plug B. Engine oil dipstick C. Engine coolant D. Windscreen washer fluid E. Brake fluid F. Power steering fluid 197) 198) 57) 199 MAINTENANCE AND CARE 3.0 140 Natural Power versions 225 F1A0375 A. Engine oil filler plug B. Engine oil dipstick C. Engine coolant D. Windscreen washer fluid E. Brake fluid F. Power steering fluid 197) 198) 57) 200 WARNING 197) Never smoke while working in the engine compartment: inflammable gases and vapours may be present, constituting a fire risk. 198) Be very careful working in the engine compartment when the engine is hot: you may get burned. Remember that the fan may start up if the engine is hot: this could injure you. Scarves, ties and other loose clothing might be pulled by moving parts. IMPORTANT 57) When topping up, take care not to mix up the various types of fluids: they are not compatible with each other and could seriously damage the vehicle. 201 MAINTENANCE AND CARE ENGINE OIL 58) Check the oil level a few minutes after stopping the engine (about 5 minutes) with the vehicle parked on level ground. Check the level is within the MIN and MAX marks on the dipstick (B) fig. 224 - fig. 225. The range between the MIN and MAX marks corresponds to about 1 litre of oil. If the level of the oil is close to or below the MIN mark, add oil through the filler (A) - fig. 224 - fig. 225 using the pipe provided, for versions/markets where provided, until the MAX mark is reached. The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark. Engine oil consumption The maximum engine oil consumption is usually 400 grams every 1,000 km. When the vehicle is new, the engine needs to be run in, therefore the engine oil consumption can only be considered stabilised after the first 5,000–6,000 km. WARNING The oil consumption depends on driving style and the conditions under which the vehicle is used. 202 WARNING After adding or changing the oil, let the engine turn over for a few seconds and wait a few minutes after turning it off before you check the level. PARAFLUUP and 40% demineralised water. WARNING Always top up using engine oil of the same specifications as that already in the engine. ENGINE COOLANT 199) 59) The coolant level must be checked when the engine is cold and must range between the MIN and MAX marks on the reservoir. If the level is to low, operate as follows: to access the reservoir filler, remove the plastic cover (A) fig. 226 by turning the locking screws (B) anticlockwise; slowly pour through the filler (C) - fig. 224 - fig. 225 the reservoir a mixture of 50% demineralised water and 50% PETRONAS LUBRICANTS PARAFLUUP until the level is close to MAX. The mixture of 50% demineralised water and 50% PARAFLU UP protects against freezing down to -35°C. When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a mixture of 60% 226 F1A0336 POWER STEERING FLUID 200) 60) 5) Check that the liquid contained in the tank is at the maximum level. This operation must be carried out with the vehicle level and with the engine off and cold. Proceed as follows: to access the reservoir filler, remove the plastic cover (A) fig. 226 by turning the locking screws (B) anticlockwise; check that the fluid level is at the MAX mark on the dipstick attached to the reservoir (F) - fig. 224 - fig. 225 (use the level shown on the 20°C side of the dipstick to check when cold). If the level of the fluid in the tank is lower than the specified level, top up using only one of the products indicated in the "Fluid and lubricants" table in the "Technical data" chapter, proceeding as follows: Start the engine and wait for the fluid level in the tank to stabilise. With the engine running, turn the steering wheel from right to left fully several times. Top up the fuel to the MAX level and then retighten the cap. PETRONAS DURANCE SC 35 and 50% water in winter. At temperatures below -20°C, use undiluted PETRONAS DURANCE SC 35 fluid. WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOW WASHER FLUID 201) 202) To add fluid: remove the cap (D) - fig. 224 fig. 225, pulling the retaining tooth outward; pull the opening of the pipe upwards to extract the telescopic funnel fig. 227. WARNING To prevent the cap from being damaged and interfering with the adjacent mechanical parts, make sure that it is correctly oriented as shown in fig. 227before opening it. Otherwise, turn it until it reaches the correct position.Fill according to the following instructions:Use a mixture of water and PETRONAS DURANCE SC 35, in the following concentrations: 30% PETRONAS DURANCE SC 35 and 70% water in winter or 50% 227 F1A0396 To close the cap, proceed as follows: push the funnel fully until it locks; close the cap. BRAKE FLUID 204) 205) 61) Undo the cap (E) - fig. 224 - fig. 225 and check that the liquid contained in the reservoir is at the maximum level. The fluid level in the reservoir must not exceed the MAX mark. When topping up, you are advised to use the brake fluid shown in the "Fluids and lubricants" table of the "Technical data" chapter. NOTE Carefully clean the plug of the reservoir and the surrounding surface. Take great care to ensure that impurities do not enter the reservoir when the cap is opened. Always use a funnel with a built-in filter with a mesh of 0.12 mm or less. WARNING Brake fluid absorbs moisture. For this reason, if the vehicle is mainly used in areas with a high degree of atmospheric humidity, the fluid should be replaced at more frequent intervals than specified in the “Scheduled Servicing Plan”. 203) 203 MAINTENANCE AND CARE WARNING IMPORTANT 199) The cooling system is pressurised. If necessary, only replace the plug with another original or the operation of the system may be adversely affected. Do not remove the reservoir plug when the engine is hot: you risk scalding yourself. 200) Prevent power steering fluid from coming into contact with hot engine parts: it is flammable. 201) Do not travel with the windscreen washer fluid reservoir empty: the windscreen washer is essential for improving visibility. 202) Some commercial windscreen washer additives are flammable. The engine compartment contains hot parts which could start a fire if they come into contact. 203) Do not release the cap from the extension without previously extracting the system using the ring. 204) Brake fluid is poisonous and highly corrosive. In the event of accidental contact, immediately wash the affected parts with water and mild soap. Then rinse thoroughly. Call a doctor immediately if swallowed. 205) The symbol , on the brake fluid container indicates if a brake fluid is synthetic or mineral­based. Use of mineral type fluids will damage the special rubber seals of the braking system beyond repair. 58) Used engine oil and replaced oil filters contain substances which are harmful to the environment. To change oil and filters, we advise you to contact a Fiat Dealership. 59) PARAFLU UP anti-freeze fluid is used in the cooling system. Use fluid of the same type as that contained in the cooling system for any top-ups. PARAFLU UP liquid cannot be mixed with any other type of fluid. If this occurs, do not start the engine and contact your Fiat Dealership immediately. 60) Do not press on the power steering end of travel with engine on for more than 8 consecutive seconds, since noise is produced and there is a risk of system damages. 61) Prevent brake fluid, which is highly corrosive, from coming into contact with painted parts. Should it happen, immediately wash with water. AIR CLEANER/POLLEN FILTER Have the air cleaner replaced by a Fiat Dealership. AIR CLEANER – DUSTY ROADS (for versions/markets, where provided) The air cleaner for dusty areas, except for versions with automatic transmission, is equipped with a visual filter clogging indicator device (A) fig. 228. IMPORTANT 5) Power steering fluid consumption is extremely low; if another top-up is required after only a short period of time, have the system checked for leaks at a Fiat Dealership. 228 F1A0238 Check the reading of the blockage sensor at intervals (Refer to the "Service Schedule"). WARNING To blow the filter use an air jet, do not use water or liquid detergents. Since this cleaner is 204 specific to versions designed for dusty areas, it is advisable to contact a Fiat Dealership to change the cleaner. BATTERY The battery is located inside the passenger compartment, in front of the pedals. Remove the protective cover to gain access to it. 206) 207) REPLACING THE BATTERY If required, replace the battery with an original spare part with the same specifications. If a battery with different specifications is fitted, the service intervals given in the “Scheduled Servicing Plan” will no longer be valid. Follow the battery manufacturer's instructions for maintenance. 208) 209) 62) 63) 6) USEFUL ADVICE FOR EXTENDING THE LIFE OF YOUR BATTERY To avoid draining your battery and make it last longer, observe the following instructions: when you park the vehicle, ensure that the doors, tailgate and bonnet are closed properly, to prevent any roof lights from remaining on inside the passenger's compartment; switch off all roof lights inside the vehicle: the vehicle is however equipped with a system which switches all internal lights off automatically; do not keep accessories (e.g. radio, hazard warning lights, etc.) switched on for a long time when the engine is not running; before carrying out any operation on the electrical system, disconnect the negative battery cable through the suitable terminal; completely tighten the battery terminals. WARNING After turning the ignition key to STOP and having closed the driver side door, wait at least one minute before disconnecting the electrical supply from the battery. When reconnecting the electrical supply to the battery, make sure that the ignition key is in the STOP position and the driver side door is closed. WARNING If the charge level remains under 50% for a long time, the battery is damaged by sulphation, reducing its capacity and efficiency at start-up.The battery is also more prone to the risk of freezing (at temperatures as high as -10°C).Refer to the paragraph "Car inactivity" in "Starting and driving" if the car is left parked for a long time. If, after buying the vehicle, you want to install electrical accessories which require permanent electric supply (alarm, etc.) or accessories that in any case burden the electrical supply, contact a Fiat Dealership, whose qualified personnel, in addition to suggesting the most suitable devices from Lineaccessori MOPAR, will evaluate the overall electrical consumption, checking whether the vehicle electrical system is capable of withstanding the load required, or whether it should be integrated with a more powerful battery. Since some of these devices continue to consume electricity even when the engine is off, they gradually run down the battery. WARNING If a tachograph is fitted, if the vehicle is parked for a long period of 5 days, it is advisable to disconnect the negative battery terminal to maintain its charge.If the vehicle is equipped with a battery disconnection function (disconnector), see the description of the procedure in the 205 MAINTENANCE AND CARE "Controls" paragraph in the "Knowing your vehicle" section. weather conditions, remove the battery and store it in a heated area to prevent it from freezing. WARNING IMPORTANT 206) Battery fluid is poisonous and corrosive: avoid contact with your skin and eyes. The battery should be charged in a well ventilated place, away from naked flames or possible sources of sparks: danger of explosion and fire. 207) Using the battery with low fluid will irreparably damage the battery and may cause an explosion. 208) Before performing any operation on the electrical system, disconnect the negative battery cable through the suitable terminal, after having waited at least one minute from turning the ignition key to STOP. 209) Always wear appropriate goggles to protect your eyes when working on or near the battery. 6) Batteries contain substances which are very harmful for the environment. You are recommended to go to a Fiat Dealership to have the battery replaced where the old battery will be disposed of respecting both the environment and the laws in force. Proceed as follows: raise the wiper arm, press tab (A) fig. 229 of the attachment spring and remove the blade from the arm; fit the new blade, inserting the tab into the special slot in the arm, making sure that it is locked; lower the wiper arm onto the windscreen. NOZZLES Windscreen (washer) fig. 230 WINDSCREEN WIPER REPLACING THE WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES 210) 64) 230 IMPORTANT 62) Incorrect installation of electric and electronic devices may cause severe damage to your vehicle. After purchasing your vehicle, if you wish to install any accessories (anti-theft, radio phone, etc.), go to a Fiat Dealership, which will suggest the most suitable devices and advise you whether a higher capacity battery needs to be installed. 63) If the vehicle will be unused for an extended period of time in extremely cold 206 229 F1A0241 F1A0242 If there is no jet, first check that there is fluid in the reservoir. Then check that the nozzle holes are not clogged: use a needle to unblock them if necessary. The washer jets should be positioned by adjusting the angle of the sprays using a small straight-headed screwdriver. The jets should be directed at about a third of the height from the top edge of the windscreen. HEADLIGHT WASHERS Check the correct condition and cleanliness of nozzles at regular intervals. The headlight washers come on automatically when the windscreen washer is operated with the low beams on. LIFTING THE VEHICLE WHEELS AND TYRES If the vehicle needs to be lifted, go to a Fiat Dealership which is equipped with the arm hoist or workshop lift. Lift the vehicle exclusively by positioning the jack arms or the shop jack in the points shown in fig. 231. WARNING 210) Driving with worn windscreen/rear window wiper blades is a serious risk, because visibility is reduced in bad weather. IMPORTANT 64) Do not operate the windscreen wiper with the blades lifted from the windscreen. 231 F1A0366 Check the pressure of each tyre including the spare wheel, approximately every two weeks and before long journeys: the pressure should be checked with the tyre rested and cold. It is normal for the pressure to increase when the vehicle is used; for the correct tyre inflation pressure, see the "Wheels" paragraph in the "Technical specifications" chapter. Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyre wear fig. 232: A normal pressure: tread evenly worn; B low pressure: tread particularly worn at the edges; C high pressure: tread particularly worn in the centre. The tyres must be replaced when the tread is less than 1.6 mm thick. In any case, follow the laws in force in the country where you are driving. 211) 212) 213) 207 MAINTENANCE AND CARE 208 232 F1A0240 IMPORTANT NOTES As far as possible, avoid sharp braking, screech starts and violent shocks against pavements, potholes or other hard obstacles. Driving for long stretches over uneven roads can damage the tyres; periodically check that the tyres have no cuts in the side wall, abnormal swelling or irregular tyre tread wear. Go to a Fiat Dealership if required; avoid overloading the car when travelling: this may cause serious damage to the wheels and tyres; if a tyre is punctured, stop immediately and replace it to avoid damage to the tyre, the rim, suspension and steering system; tyres age even if they are not used much. Cracks in the tread and on the sidewalls are a sign of ageing. In any event, have the tyres checked by specialised technicians if they have been fitted for longer than 6 years. Remember to check the spare wheel very carefully; in the case of replacement, always fit new tyres, avoiding those of unknown origin; if a tyre is changed, also change the inflation valve; to allow even wear between the front and rear tyres, it is advisable to change them over every 10–15 thousand kilometres, keeping them on the same side of the vehicle so as not to reverse the direction of rotation. WARNING Replacing a tyre, check that the tyre pressure monitoring (TPMS) sensor is also taken from the previous rim, together with the valve. SNOW TYRES The performance of these tyres is considerably reduced when the tread depth is less than 4 mm. Replace them in this case. WARNING When using snow tyres with a maximum speed index below the one that can be reached by the vehicle (increased by 5%), place a notice in the passenger compartment, plainly in view, which states the maximum speed allowed by the snow tyres (as per EC Directive).All four tyres should be the same (brand and track) to ensure greater safety when driving and braking as well as a good manoeuvrability.Remember that you should not change the rotation direction of the tyres. WARNING 214) 211) If tyre pressure is too low, the tyre may overheat and be severely damaged as a result. 212) Do not switch tyres from the right­hand side of the vehicle to the left­hand side, and vice versa. 213) Do not repaint alloy wheel rims at temperatures higher than 150°C. The mechanical features of the wheels could be compromised. WARNING 214) The maximum speed for snow tyres marked “Q" is 160 km/h, while it is 190 km/h for “T" tyres and 210 km/h for "H" tyres. You should, however, always stick to the speed limits of the highway code. SNOW CHAINS The use of snow chains should be in compliance with local regulations of each country. Snow chains can be fitted to the tyres of the front wheels (drive wheels) only. Use of Lineaccessori MOPAR snow chains is recommended. Check the tension of the snow chains after the first few metres have been driven. 65) WARNING With snow chains, use the accelerator with extreme care to prevent, or to limit as much as possible, slipping of the drive wheels that could cause chain breakage, resulting in damage to the vehicle body or mechanical components. WARNING For versions fitted with 225/75 R16 tyre, use snow chains with max. thickness 16 mm.When travelling on snowy roads with snow chains, it may be helpful to turn the ASR off: in fact, in these conditions, the drive wheels skidding when setting off gives you better traction. IMPORTANT 65) Keep the vehicle speed down when snow chains are fitted; never exceed 50 km/h. Avoid potholes, do not drive over steps or pavements, and do not drive long distances over roads without snow, to avoid damaging both your vehicle and the road surface. BODYWORK PROTECTION AGAINST ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS The main causes of corrosion are the following: atmospheric pollution; salty air and humidity (coastal areas, or hot humid climates); seasonal environmental conditions. ADVICE FOR PRESERVING THE BODYWORK Paintwork Paintwork does not only serve an aesthetic purpose, but also protects the underlying sheet metal. You are advised to touch up abrasions and scratches immediately to prevent rust formation. Use only original paint products for touch-ups (see “Bodywork paint identification plate” in the “Technical specifications” section). Normal maintenance of paintwork consists in washing the vehicle: the frequency depends on the conditions and environment where the vehicle is used. For example, it is advisable to wash the vehicle more often in areas with high levels of environmental pollution or on roads spread with salt. To correctly wash the vehicle, proceed as follows: wash the bodywork using a low pressure jet of water; wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy solution over the bodywork, frequently rinsing the sponge; rinse well with water and dry with a jet of air or a chamois leather. If you put the vehicle through a vehicle wash, follow these recommendations: remove the aerial from the roof so it does not get damaged; the vehicle should be washed with water added to a soapy solution; rinse thoroughly to avoid soap marks remaining on the bodywork or less visible parts. Windows To clean glasses, use specific cleaning products. Use clean cloths to avoid 209 MAINTENANCE AND CARE scratching the glass or altering the transparency. WARNING Wipe the rear window inside gently with a cloth following the direction of the filaments to avoid damaging the heating device. Headlights WARNING Never use aromatic substances (e.g. petrol) or ketones (e.g. acetone) for cleaning the plastic lenses of the headlights. 66) 7) ENGINE COMPARTMENT WASHING 67) If the engine compartment is washed (at low pressure, e.g. in very dusty areas), this must be done with the engine cold and with ignition device turned to STOP. Take care not to direct the water jet straight at the electronic control modules or the wiper motors. Have this operation performed by a specialised workshop. After washing, check that the various protective components (e.g. rubber guards and caps) have not been removed or damaged. 210 IMPORTANT 66) Some automatic systems equipped with old generation blades and/or with a poor maintenance can damage the paint, promoting the creation of microscoring which give an opaque/coated appearance to the paint, especially on dark colours. In this case, just lightly polish with specific products. 67) A high pressure jet cleaner should not be used for cleaning the engine compartment. The appropriate precautions have been taken to protect all parts and connections, but the pressures generated by these devices are so high that complete protection against water seepages cannot be guaranteed. IMPORTANT 7) Detergents pollute the water. The vehicle should be washed in areas equipped for collecting and purifying the liquid used in the washing process. INTERIOR Regularly check that water is not trapped under the mats (due to water dripping off shoes, umbrellas, etc.), as this could cause oxidation of the sheet metal. 215) 216) FABRIC SEATS AND PARTS Remove dust with a soft brush or a vacuum cleaner. It is advisable to use a moist brush on velvet upholstery. Rub the seats with a sponge moistened with a solution of water and neutral detergent. PLASTIC PARTS It is advisable to clean interior plastic parts with a moist cloth and a solution of water and non-abrasive mild soap. Use specific products for cleaning plastic, without solvents and specifically designed to prevent damage to the appearance and colour of the treated parts, to remove grease and tough stains. WARNING Do not use alcohol, petrols or derivatives to clean the instrument panel glass. LEATHER STEERING WHEEL/GEAR LEVER KNOB/HANDBRAKE (for versions/markets, where provided) These components must be cleaned with mild soap and water only. Never use alcohol or alcohol-based products. WARNING RUBBER HOSES With regards to the maintenance of the brake system and fuel system rubber hoses, carefully follow the "Service Schedule”. Ozone, high temperatures and prolonged lack of fluid in the system may cause hardening and cracking of the hoses, with possible leaks. Careful checking is therefore necessary. 215) Never use flammable products, such as petroleum ether or modified petrol, to clean the inside of the vehicle. The electrostatic charges which are generated by rubbing during the cleaning operation may cause a fire. 216) Do not keep aerosol cans in the vehicle: they might explode. Aerosol cans must not be exposed to temperatures higher than 50°C. Temperatures may greatly exceed this value inside a vehicle exposed to direct sunlight. 211 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 212 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Everything you may find useful for understanding how your vehicle is made and works is contained in this chapter and illustrated with data, tables and graphics. For the enthusiasts and the technician, but also just for those who want to know every detail of their vehicle. IDENTIFICATION DATA ............... ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSION .................................. ENGINE .................................... STEERING ................................ WHEELS................................... DIMENSIONS ............................ PERFORMANCE ........................ WEIGHTS AND LOADS............... REFUELLING............................. FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ......... FUEL CONSUMPTION AND CO2 EMISSIONS ....................... 213 215 217 219 220 225 235 238 242 245 249 IDENTIFICATION DATA It is advisable to take note of the identification codes. Identification codes are printed and shown on the plates as indicated below, together with the positions: VIN plate. Chassis marking. Bodywork paint identification plate. Engine marking. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE 233 (E) Maximum permitted weight of vehicle fully laden. (F) Maximum permitted weight of vehicle fully laden plus trailer. (G) Maximum permitted weight on first axle (front). (H) Maximum permitted weight on second axle (rear). (I) Engine type. (L) Bodywork version code. (M) Spare part number. (N) Correct value of smoke coefficient (for diesel engines). CHASSIS MARKING They are located respectively: one on the passenger side interior wheel housing (A) fig. 234 , the other on the lower part of the windscreen fig. 235. The marking includes: type of vehicle; chassis serial number. 235 F1A0365 BODYWORK PAINT IDENTIFICATION PLATE This plate is fitted to the engine compartment front crossmember and contains the following identification data fig. 236: (A) Paint manufacturer. (B) Colour name. (C) Fiat colour code. (D) Respray and touch-up colour code. F1A0243 This plate is fitted to the engine compartment front crossmember and contains the following data fig. 233: (A) Name of manufacturer. (B) Type-approval number. (C) Vehicle type identification code. (D) Chassis number. 234 F1A0244 236 F1A0369 213 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE MARKING It is stamped on the cylinder block and includes the type and the engine serial number. CYLINDER MARKING Each methane cylinder is identified in the plant by information stamped on the cylinder cone. 237 F0N0405M The other plates provided by the Dealership with the vehicle documents show the date when the first cylinder inspection/test is due. 68) SYSTEM INSPECTION The cylinders must be inspected, in accordance with ECE Regulation Procedure no. 110, every 4 years from the vehicle registration date or in accordance with specific regulations in individual countries. 214 IMPORTANT 68) If the vehicle has been registered in a country other than Italy, the certification data, identification and inspection procedures for the methane cylinders should conform to the legislation in that country. In any case, it should be remembered that the life of the cylinders is 20 years from the production date as set out in ECE Regulation 110. ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSION Version Engine code 2.3 120 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® F1AGL4114 2.3 140 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® F1AGL4113 2.3 160 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® F1AGL4112 2.3 180 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® F1AGL4111 3.0 140 Natural Power F1CFA401A 215 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS There is an example of a bodywork version code below by way of explanation with a key which is valid for all bodywork version codes. Example: 250 A M M F A DX 250 MODEL A GVW M ENGINE M ENGINE AXLES/TRANSMISSION F BODYWORK A WHEELBASE DX VERSION GVW A 3000 kg B 3300 kg C 3500 kg D 3500 kg MAXI E 3995/4005/4250 kg MAXI F 2800 kg G 3650 kg H 3510 kg MAXI L 3510 kg M 4400 kg MAXI ENGINE D 2.3 120 HP Multijet with AdBlue® E 2.3 140 HP Multijet with AdBlue® F 2.3 160 HP Multijet with AdBlue® G 2.3 180 HP Multijet with AdBlue® H 3.0 140 Natural Power 216 L 2.3 180 HP Multijet with AdBlue® and automatic transmission AT9 TRANSMISSION N Mechanical gearbox B Automatic transmission AT9 WHEELBASE A Short wheelbase B Medium wheelbase C Long wheelbase D Medium-long wheelbase U All wheelbases (incomplete vehicles) BODYWORK A Cab chassis B Chassis without cab C Cab floor D Caisson F Van G Extended cab caisson H Extended cab chassis M Minibus P Panorama R Combi 6/9-seater ENGINE 2.3 120 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® 2.3 140 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® 2.3 160 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® 2.3 180 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® F1AGL4114 F1AGL4113 F1AGL4112 F1AGL4111 Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel Number and position of cylinders 4 in line 4 in line 4 in line 4 in line Piston bore and stroke (mm) 88 × 94 88 × 94 88 × 94 88 × 94 2287 2287 2287 2287 16.2 : 1 16.2 : 1 16.2 : 1 16.2 : 1 Maximum power (EC) (kW) 88 103 118 130 Maximum power (EEC) (HP) 120 140 160 180 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 3600 3600 3500 3500 Maximum torque (EEC) (Nm) 320 350 380 400 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 1400 1400 1500 1500 General information Engine code Cycle Total displacement (cm³) Compression ratio Fuel Diesel for motor vehicles (EN590 Specification) 217 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS General information Engine code Cycle Number and position of cylinders Piston bore and stroke (mm) Total displacement (cm³) Compression ratio F1CFA401A Otto 4 in line 95.8 × 104 2999 12.5 ± 0.5:1 Maximum power (EC) (kW) 100 Maximum power (EEC) (HP) 136 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 3500 Maximum torque (EEC) (Nm) 350 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 1500 Plugs Fuel 218 3.0 140 Natural Power Champion RC7BYC – NGK IFRF-D Methane STEERING Versions Kerb-to-kerb turning circle (m) Short wheelbase 11.06 Medium wheelbase 12.46 Medium-long wheelbase 13.54 Long wheelbase 14.28 Extra-long wheelbase 15.3 Type Rack and pinion with hydraulic power steering. 219 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS WHEELS RIMS AND TYRES Alloy or pressed steel rims. Tubeless radial carcass tyres. All approved tyres are listed in the registration document. WARNING If there are any discrepancies between the Owner Handbook and the Registration Document, take the information from the latter. To ensure driving safety, make sure that all the wheels are fitted with tyres of the same make and type. WARNING Do not use air chambers with tubeless tyres. SPARE WHEEL Pressed steel rim. Tubeless tyre. WHEEL GEOMETRY Front wheels toe-in measured between rims: -1 ±1 mm. The values refer to the vehicle in running order. 220 RIMS AND TYRES PROVIDED Rims for versions with manual gearbox VERSION TYRES PAYLOAD (Size/Load index and speed) RIM 3000 LIGHT 15” 3300 215/70 R15 C (109/107 S) 225/70 R15C (112/110 S) 3500 – 3000 LIGHT TEMPO LIBERO 15" 3300 215/70 R15 CP (109/107 Q) LIGHT TEMPO LIBERO 16" 3300 3500 3300 3500/3650 215/75 R16 C (116/114 R) 225/75 R16 CP (116/114 Q) 3500 215/75 R16C (116/114 R) 4000/4250 215/75 R16C (116/114 R) excluding PTT 4250 MAXI 3500 MAXI TEMPO LIBERO 4000/4250 4400 6 Jx15-68 225/75 R16C (116/114 R) M+S 6 Jx16-68 225/75 R16C (116/114 R) M+S 6 Jx16-68 – – 3500/3650 LIGHT 16'' 225/70 R15C (112/110 R) M+S 225/75 R16 CP (116/114 Q) 225/75 R16C (116/114 R) – – 225/75 R16C (116/114 R) – – 221 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Rims for versions with automatic transmission TYRES VERSION PAYLOAD LIGHT 15'' 3000 215/70 R15 C (109/107 S) 225/70 R15C (112/110 S) 3000 215/70 R15 CP (109/107 Q) – 215/75 R16 C (116/114 R) 225/75 R16C (116/114 R) 3300/3500/3650 225/75 R16 CP (116/114 Q) – 3500 215/75 R16C (116/114 R) 4000/4250 215/75 R16C (116/114 R) excluding PTT 4250kg LIGHT TEMPO LIBERO 15" LIGHT 16'' LIGHT TEMPO LIBERO 16" 3300 3500 MAXI (Size/Load index and speed) 3500 MAXI TEMPO LIBERO 4000/4250 4400 222 225/75 R16 CP (116/114 Q) RIM 225/70 R15C (112/110 R) M+S 6 Jx15-68 225/75 R16C (116/114 R) M+S 6 Jx16-68 225/75 R16C (116/114 R) M+S 6 Jx16-68 225/75 R16C (116/114 R) – – If using M+S winter tyres with speed index lower than “S" for 15" wheels and “R" for 16" wheels, respect the max. vehicle speed indicated in the table: Maximum speed index. WARNING Only use the tyres indicated on the vehicle Registration document.If using class C tyres on a Camping vehicle, always use wheels with a metal inflation valve. When replacing, it is always advisable to use Camping tyres. COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar) Tyres provided Front Rear 3000 PTT (*) with basic tyres, except PANORAMA 4.0 4.0 3300 GVW (*) / 3500 PTT (*) with basic tyres 4.1 4.5 PANORAMA with basic tyres 4.1 4.5 3000 PTT (*) with oversized tyres, except PANORAMA 4.0 4.0 3300 GVW (*) / 3500 GVW (*) with oversized tyres 4.1 4.5 225/70 R15 C Winter and All-Seasons tyres 4.1 4.5 225/70 R15 C PANORAMA with oversized tyres 4.1 4.5 Vehicles with Camping tyres 5.0 5.5 215/75 R16 C For all versions/trim levels 4.5 5.0 225/75 R16 C For all versions/trim levels, except for Winter and All-Seasons tyres 4.5 5.0 225/75 R16 C Winter tyres 4.5 4.8 215/70 R15 C 215/70 R15 C 225/70 R15 C 215/70 R15 CP 223 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 224 Tyres provided Front Rear All-Seasons tyres 4.5 5.0 225/75 R16 CP Vehicles with Camping tyres 5.5 5.5 225/75 R16 CP Maxi 4400 GVW (*) with Camping tyres (for versions/markets, where provided) 5.5 5.5 225/75 R16 C (*) Gross Vehicle Weight The pressure value can be up to +1.0 bar more than the recommended one when the tyres are warm. However, recheck that the value is correct with the tyre cold. DIMENSIONS PANORAMA / COMBI VERSION Dimensions are expressed in mm and refer to the vehicle fitted with standard tyres. Height is measured with vehicle unladen. 238 F1A0367 225 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS COMBI - PANORAMA CH1 MH2 LH2 A 948 948 948 B 3000 3450 4035 C 1015 1015 1015 - 1380 (*) D 4963 5413 5998 - 6363 (*) E 2254 2524 2524 F 1810 1810 1810 G 2050 2050 2050 I 1790 1790 1790 * MINIBUS version, 16 + 1 seats The sizes vary according to the various versions within the limits indicated above. 226 VAN VERSION Dimensions are expressed in mm and refer to the vehicle fitted with standard tyres. Height is measured with vehicle unladen. 239 F1A0328 227 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VAN CH1 - CH2 MH1 - MH2 LH2 - LH3 XLH2 - XLH3 A 948 948 948 948 B 3000 3450 4035 4035 C 1015 1015 1015 1380 D 4963 5413 5998 6363 E 2254 - 2524 2254 - 2524 (*) 2524 - 2764 (**) 2524 - 2764 F 1810 1810 1810 1810 G 2050 2050 2050 2050 I 1790 1790 1790 1790 * MAXI 2269 - 2539 version ** MAXI 2539 - 2774 version The sizes vary according to the various versions within the limits indicated above. 228 TRUCK VERSION Dimensions are expressed in mm and refer to the vehicle fitted with standard tyres. Height is measured with vehicle unladen. 240 F1A0329 229 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TRUCK BODY CHASSIS CAB CH1 MH1 LH1 XLH1 CH1 MH1 MLH1 LH1 XLH1 XXLH1 A 948 948 948 948 948 948 948 948 948 B 3000 3450 4035 4035 3000 3450 3800 4035 4035 4300 C 1345 1345 1345 1710 960 960 960 1325 1590 D 5293 5743 6328 6693 4908 5358 5708 5943 6308 6573 E 2798 3248 3833 4198 – – – – – F 2424 2424 2424 2424 2254 2254 2254 2254 2519 G 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 H 1790 1790 1790 1790 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 - 1980 L 2100 2100 2100 2100 2050 2050 2050 2050 2050 The sizes vary according to the various versions within the limits indicated above. 230 CHASSIS COWL SPECIAL CAB VAN CH1 MH1 MLH1 LH1 XLH1 XXLH1 CH1 MH1 MLH1 LH1 XLH1 XXLH1 A 925 925 925 925 925 948 948 948 948 948 B 3000 3450 3800 4035 4035 4300 3000 3450 3800 4035 4035 4300 C 860 860 860 1225 1490 880 880 880 1245 1510 D 4785 5235 5585 5820 6125 6390 4828 5278 5628 5863 6228 6493 E – – – – – – – – – – F – – – – – 2254 2254 2254 2254 2254 G 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 H 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 1790 1980 L 2050 2050 2050 2050 2050 2050 2050 2050 2050 2050 The sizes vary according to the various versions within the limits indicated above. 231 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 232 SPECIAL CHASSIS COWL CH1 MH1 - MH2 LH1 XLH1 XXLH1 A 925 925 925 925 925 B 3000 3450 - 3800 4035 4035 4300 C 880 880 880 1245 1510 D 4805 5255 - 5605 5840 6205 6470 G 1810 1810 1810 1810 1810 H 1790 - 1980 1790 - 1980 1790 - 1980 1790 - 1980 1790 - 1980 L 2050 2050 2050 2050 2050 The sizes vary according to the various versions within the limits indicated above. CREW CAB VERSION Dimensions are expressed in mm and refer to the vehicle fitted with standard tyres. Height is measured with vehicle unladen. 241 F1A0368 233 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CREW CAB MH1 LH1 XLH1 A 948 948 948 B 3450 4035 4035 C 1340 1245 1695 D 5798 6228 6678 E 2424 2424 2424 F 1810 1810 1810 G 2100 2100 2100 I 1790 1790 1790 The sizes vary according to the various versions within the limits indicated above. 234 PERFORMANCE Top permitted speed after initial vehicle use in km/h. Versions with manual gearbox BODYWORK VERSION 2.3 120 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® Light 2.3 140 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® Light Heavy 2.3 160 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® 2.3 180 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® 3.0 140 Natural Power Light Heavy Light (*) Heavy (**) – LOW roof (H1) 148 156 163 162 170 (*) 161 (**) 161 159 MEDIUM roof (H2) 143 153 159 158 165 (*) 161 (**) 161 155 HIGH roof (H3) 138 149 154 153 161 156 153 TRAILER TRUCK / CAB CHASSIS / CHASSIS COWLS / PLATFORMS (excluding Tempo Libero version) LOW roof (H1) 148 156 163 162 170 (*) 161 (**) 161 159 CAB CHASSIS / CHASSIS COWLS (Tempo Libero version) LOW roof (H1) 148 152 VAN (excluding Tempo Libero version) 152 152 – 235 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 236 BODYWORK VERSION 2.3 120 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® Light VAN (Tempo Libero version) 2.3 140 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® Light Heavy 2.3 160 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® Light Heavy 2.3 180 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® Light (*) Heavy (**) 3.0 140 Natural Power – LOW roof (H1) 148 152 152 152 – MEDIUM roof (H2) 146 152 152 152 – HIGH roof (H3) 141 149 152 152 – (*) Versions with 15" rims (**) Versions with 16" rims Versions with automatic transmission 2.3 140 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® BODYWORK VERSION Light Heavy 2.3 160 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® Light Heavy 2.3 180 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® Light Heavy LOW roof (H1) 155 162 (R15) 161 (R16) 169 (R15) 161 (R16) 161 MEDIUM roof (H2) 152 158 164 (R15) 161 (R16) 161 HIGH roof (H3) 148 153 TRAILER TRUCK / CAB CHASSIS / CHASSIS COWLS / PLATFORMS (excluding Tempo Libero version) LOW roof (H1) 155 162 (R15) 161 (R16) CAB CHASSIS / CHASSIS COWLS (Tempo Libero version) LOW roof (H1) 152 152 152 LOW roof (H1) 152 152 152 MEDIUM roof (H2) 152 152 152 HIGH roof (H3) 148 152 152 VAN (excluding Tempo Libero version) VAN (Tempo Libero version) 160 169 (R15) 161 (R16) 161 NOTE N2-category vehicles are limited to 90 km/h by type-approval requirements. NOTE M2-category vehicles are limited to 100 km/h by type-approval requirements. Speed limiter type-approved for 171 km/h for complete/incomplete No Tempo Libero with 15” (*) Speed limiter type-approved for 161 km/h for complete/incomplete No Tempo Libero with 16” (**) Speed limiter type-approved for 152 km/h for Tempo Libero 237 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS WEIGHTS AND LOADS To identify the weights and loads for your vehicle, refer to the plate shown in fig. 242 and described in the “Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate" chapter or refer to the vehicle registration certificate showing the type-approved weights (for markets, where provided). WARNING Do not exceed the indicated trailer and towable weights. WARNING Respect the vehicle towing capacities. The tables show the towable weight for engine version. 242 F1A0245 (E) Maximum permitted weight of fully laden vehicle (GVW). (F) Maximum permitted weight of the vehicle (GVW) fully laden plus trailer. If there is no value in the field or if there is a dash, it means that the vehicle cannot tow (G) Maximum permitted weight on first axle (front). (H) Maximum permitted weight on second axle (rear). 238 To calculate the towable weight with a braked trailer, take the difference between values (F) and (E) shown on the plate. E.g.: F = 6000 kg - E = 3500 kg Braked trailer = 2500 kg TOWABLE WEIGHTS (kg) Key: A = TOWABLE WEIGHT B = UNBRAKED TRAILER C = LOAD ON TOW HOOK VERSION (GVW) A B C 2000 750 100 2500 750 100 2500 750 100 2500 750 100 2.3 160 HP Multijet with AdBlue® 2500 750 100 2.3 180 HP Multijet with AdBlue® 2500 750 100 3.0 140 Natural Power 2500 750 100 3000(*) 750 120(*) 3000 750 100 2500 750 100 4250 2250 750 100 3500 3000(*) 750 120(*) 3000 750 100 2500 750 100 2250 750 100 2800 3000/3300/3500/3650 3000/3300/3500/3510 LIGHT 3650 (T.L. Tempo Libero) 3000/3300/3500/3510/3650 3500 ENGINE 2.3 120 HP Multijet with AdBlue® 2.3 140 HP Multijet with AdBlue® 3500 3510 3995/4005/4400 MAXI 3510 3995/4005 4250 2.3 140 HP Multijet with AdBlue® 2.3 160 HP Multijet with AdBlue® 239 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS VERSION (GVW) ENGINE A B C 2.3 160 HP Multijet with AdBlue® 2100 750 100 3500 3000(*) 750 120(*) 3510 3000 750 100 2500 750 100 4250 2250 750 100 4400 2100 750 100 3500 3000 750 100 2500 750 100 2250 750 100 2250/2200(°) 750 100 4400 3995/4005 MAXI 2.3 180 HP Multijet with AdBlue® 3995/4005 3.0 140 Natural Power 3820 4250 (*) For Special T.L. 2500 Kg (towable weight = 100 Kg) (°) Increased suspension NOTE The following vehicles are excluded from the table: Key: A = TOWABLE WEIGHT B = UNBRAKED TRAILER C = LOAD ON TOW HOOK ENGINE ALL 240 BODYWORK VERSION MINIBUS / BASE MINIBUS ALL GVW A B C 4005 / 4250 / 4300 – – – ENGINE BODYWORK VERSION GVW A B C 2.3 180 HP Multijet with AdBlue® (*) Heavy 4250/4300 2250 - 2200 750 – (*) AT9 automatic transmission NOTE For vehicles with tow hook: the vertical static load on the tow hook must be within the maximum permitted weight declared for the vehicle. MAX (Maximum permitted weight + TOWABLE WEIGHT) = 6500 kg 241 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS REFUELLING 2.3 120 HP -140 HP -160 HP -180 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® Fuel tank (litres): 75 (*) Including a reserve of (litres): 10/12 UREA tank (where provided) approx. capacity (litres): 19 Prescribed fuels and original lubricants Automotive Diesel (EN590 specifications) AdBlue® (water-UREA solution) standard DIN 70 070 and ISO 22241-1 217) 218) (*) A 90 litre tank is available on request for all versions (with reserve of 12 litres). With the "Tempo Libero" option a 60 litre tank is available on request (with reserve of 9 litres). WARNING 217) Use AdBlue® only according to DIN 70 070 and ISO 22241-1. Other fluids may cause damage to the system: also exhaust emissions would no longer comply with the law. 218) The distribution companies are responsible for the compliance of their product. Observe the precautions of storage and servicing, in order to preserve the initial qualities. The manufacturer of the vehicle does not recognise any guarantee in case of malfunctions and damage caused to the vehicle due to the use urea (AdBlue®) not in accordance with regulations. 242 2.3 120 HP -140 HP -160 HP -180 HP Multijet with AdBlue ® Engine cooling system: 10 (**) Engine sump (litres): 5.7 Engine sump and filter (litres): 6.3 Transmission/differential casing (litres): 2.7 (MLGU gearbox) Transmission/differential casing (litres): 2.9 (M40 gearbox) Prescribed fuels and original lubricants 50% mixture of distilled water and PARAFLUUP (***) SELENIA WR Forward 0W-30 TUTELA TRANSMISSION EXPERYA TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARTECH Automatic transmission casing AT9 (litres): 6.0 TUTELA TRANSMISSION AS8 Hydraulic braking circuit with ABS (kg): 0.6 Hydraulic braking circuit with ASR/ESC (kg): 0.62 Hydraulic power steering: 1.5 TUTELA TRANSMISSION GI/E Windscreen/headlight washer reservoir: 5.5 Mixture of water and liquid PETRONAS DURANCE SC 35 TUTELA TOP 4/S (**) With Webasto: + 1/4 litre - Underseat heating 600 cc: + 1 litre - Underseat heating 900cc: + 1.5 litres - Underseat heating + Webasto: + 1.25 litres - Underseat heating + Webasto: +1.75 litres (***) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a 60% mixture of PARAFLUUP and 40% demineralised water. 243 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 3.0 140 Natural Power Fuel tank (litres): Including a reserve of (litres): Engine cooling system: Petrol: 14.5 Methane (kg): 36 (°) (°°) Petrol: 8 10 (***) Engine sump (litres): 8 Engine sump and filter (litres): 9 Prescribed fuels and original lubricants Petrol with an octane number (RON) no lower than 95 (EN228 specification) Automotive methane and bio-methane (EN16723 specification) 50% mixture of distilled water and PARAFLUUP (****) SELENIA MULTIPOWER GAS 5W-40 Gearbox/differential casing (litres): 2.9 TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARTECH Hydraulic braking circuit with ASR/ESC (kg): 0.62 TUTELA TOP 4/S Hydraulic power steering: 1.5 TUTELA TRANSMISSION GI/E (red) (°) Range on methane: 400 km (°°) The amount of methane depends on the outside temperature, the supply pressure, the quality of the gas and the type of refuelling system. The total volume of the cylinders is about 220 litres (218.5 nominal) for all versions (***) With Webasto: + 1/4 litre - Underseat heating 600 cc: + 1 litre - Underseat heating 900 cc: + 1.5 litres - Underseat heating + Webasto: + 1.25 litres - Underseat heating + Webasto: +1.75 litres (****) In particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a 60% mixture of PARAFLUUP and 40% demineralised water IMPORTANT It should be remembered that when using a fuel such as methane the range is very variable because it also depends on the temperature of the gas in the cylinder, as well as on driving conditions and vehicle maintenance. The methane actually heats up during the refuelling and cools down whilst driving, undergoing variations in pressure that reduce the quantity that can be used. 244 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and duration. 69) PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Use Diesel engine lubricants Lubricants for petrol/methane engines Features SAE 0W-30 ACEA C2 SAE 5W-40 ACEA C3 Specification Original fluids and lubricants 9.55535-DS1 SELENIA WR FORWARD 0W-30 Contractual Technical Reference N° F842.F13 According to Service Schedule 9.55535-T2 SELENIA MULTIPOWER GAS 5W-40 Contractual Technical Reference N° F922.E09 According to Service Schedule Replacement interval If lubricants conforming to the required specification are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used to top up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed. 245 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Use Specification Original fluids and lubricants 9.55550-MZ2 TUTELA TRANSMISSION EXPERYA Contractual Technical Reference N° F002.F13 Mechanical transmission and differential (MLGU transmission) 9.55550-MZ3 TUTELA TRANSMISSION GEARTECH Contractual Technical Reference N° F704.C08 Manual gearbox and differential 9.55550-AV5 TUTELA TRANSMISSION AS8 Contractual Technical Reference N° F139.I11 Lubricant for versions with AT9 automatic gearbox Molybdenum disulphide grease, for use at high temperatures. Consistency NLGI 1-2 9.55580 - GRAS II TUTELA ALL STAR Contractual Technical Reference N° F702.G07 Wheel side constant velocity joints Low friction coefficient grease for constant velocity joints. Consistency NLGI 0-1 9.55580 - GRAS II TUTELA STAR 700 Contractual Technical Reference N° F701.C07 Differential side constant velocity joints 9.55550-AG2 TUTELA TRANSMISSION GI/E Contractual Technical Reference N° F001.C94 Hydraulic power steering Features SAE 75W grade synthetic lubricant Synthetic base lubricant SAE 75W-85 grade Lubricants and greases for drive transmission Synthetic lubricant Lubricant for power steering. Exceeds "ATF DEXRON III" specifications 246 Replacement interval Use Features Brake fluid Synthetic fluid for brake and clutch systems. Exceeds specifications: FMVSS n° 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925, SAE J 1704. Protective agent for radiators Red protective with antifreeze action, based on inhibited monoethyl glycol with organic formula. Exceeds CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications. Diesel fuel additive Additive for diesel antifreeze, protecting diesel engines. AdBlue® (UREA) additive for diesel emissions Water-AdBlue® (UREA) solution Windscreen washer fluid Mixture of spirits and surfactants. Exceeds the CUNA NC 956-II specification Specification Original fluids and lubricants Replacement interval MS.90039 TUTELA TOP 4/S Contractual Technical Reference N° F005.F15 Hydraulic brakes and hydraulic clutch controls 9.55523 or MS.90032 PARAFLUUP Contractual Technical Reference N° F101.M01 Cooling circuits. Use rate 50% up to -35°C. Mixture with different formulation products not allowed. (*) – PETRONAS DURANCE DIESEL ART Contractual Technical Reference N° F601.L06 To be mixed with diesel (25 cc per 10 litres) AdBlue ® (UREA) To be used for filling the AdBlue® (UREA) tank on vehicles equipped with Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system PETRONAS DURANCE SC 35 Contractual Technical Reference N° F001.D16 To be used neat or dilute in screen washer systems. DIN 70 070 and ISO 22241-1 MS.90043 (*) When the vehicle is used in particularly harsh weather conditions, we recommend using a 60% mixture of PARAFLUUP and 40% demineralised water. 247 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 248 IMPORTANT 69) The use of products with specifications other than those indicated above could cause damage to the engine not covered by the warranty. FUEL CONSUMPTION AND CO2 EMISSIONS The fuel consumption and CO2 emission figures declared by the manufacturer are determined on the basis of the type-approval tests laid down by the applicable standards in the country where the vehicle is registered. The type of route, traffic situations, weather conditions, driving style, general conditions of the vehicle, trim level/equipment/accessories, climate control system, vehicle load, roof rack, other situations that affect aerodynamics or air drag may lead to different fuel consumption levels than those measured. The fuel consumption will only become more regular after driving the first 3000 km. To find the specific fuel consumption and CO2 emission figures for this vehicle, please refer to the data in the Certificate of Conformity, and the related documentation that accompanies the vehicle. 249 MULTIMEDIA 250 MULTIMEDIA This chapter describes the main functions of the Uconnect™ Radio, Uconnect™ 5" Radio and Uconnect™ 5" Radio Nav infotainment systems that can be fitted on the vehicle. RADIO ...................................... TIPS, CONTROLS AND GENERAL INFORMATION ........... Uconnect™ RADIO .................... OPERATION .............................. Uconnect™ 5" RADIO – Uconnect™ 5" RADIO NAV ......... OPERATION .............................. OFFICIAL TYPE APPROVALS ...... 251 251 254 259 263 268 272 RADIO TIPS, CONTROLS AND GENERAL INFORMATION (for versions/markets, where provided) For radio operation, consult the Supplement attached to this Owner Handbook. SETUP (for versions/markets, where provided) The system consists of: radio supply leads; front speaker connection cables; aerial supply lead; 2 tweeters (A) located in the front doors (30W max power each) fig. 243; 2 mid-woofers (B) located in the front doors (165 mm diameter, 40W max power each) fig. 244; 2 full range located on the rear sides (40W max. power each) (for Panorama versions); radio aerial lead; aerial. The radio must be installed in the place occupied by the central storage compartment, where you will find the wiring. 219) ROAD SAFETY Learn how to use the various system functions before setting off. Read the instructions for the system carefully before setting off. 243 F1A0139 220) 221) RECEPTION CONDITIONS Reception conditions change constantly while driving. Reception may be interfered with by the presence of mountains, buildings or bridges, especially when you are far away from the broadcaster. 244 F1A0140 WARNING 219) For connection to the existing devices supplied in the vehicle contact Fiat Dealership to prevent any trouble that could impair vehicle safety. WARNING The volume may be increased when receiving traffic information and news. CARE AND MAINTENANCE Observe the following precautions to ensure the system is fully operational: the display lens should not come into contact with pointed or rigid objects which could damage its surface; use a soft, dry anti-static cloth to clean and do not press. 251 MULTIMEDIA never use alcohol, petrols and derivatives to clean the display lens. Prevent any liquid from entering the system: this could damage it beyond repair. 70) 71) ANTITHEFT PROTECTION The system is equipped with an anti-theft protection system based on the exchange of information with the electronic control unit (Body Computer) on the vehicle. This guarantees maximum safety and prevents the secret code from being entered after the power supply has been disconnected. If the check has a positive outcome, the system will start to operate, whereas if the comparison codes are not the same or if the electronic control unit (Body Computer) is replaced, the system will ask the user to enter the secret code according to the procedure described in the paragraph below. Entering the secret code When the system is switched on, if the code is requested, the display will show "Please enter Anti-Theft Code" followed by the screen showing a keypad to enter the secret code. The secret code is made up of four digits from 0 to 9. 252 Uconnect™ Radio: The secret code is made up of four digits, from 0 to 9: to insert the code, turn the "BROWSE ENTER" right knob and press to confirm. Uconnect™ 5" Radio – Uconnect™ 5" Radio NAV: The secret code is made up of four digits, from 1 to 9: to insert the first number of the code press the corresponding key on the display. Enter the other code digits in the same way. After inserting the fourth digit, move the cursor to "OK" and press the "BROWSE/ENTER" right knob: the system will start to operate. If an incorrect code is entered, the system displays "Incorrect Code" to notify the user of the need to enter the correct code. After the 3 available attempts to enter the code, the system displays "Incorrect Code. Radio locked. Wait for 30 minutes". After the text has disappeared it is possible to start the code entering procedure again. Vehicle radio passport This document certifies ownership of the system. The vehicle radio passport shows the system model, serial number and secret code. In the case of loss of the radio passport, contact the Fiat Dealership, taking an ID document and the vehicle ownership documents. WARNING Keep the vehicle radio passport in a safe place so that you can give the information to the relevant authorities if the system is stolen. WARNINGS Look at the screen only and when it is necessary and safe. If you need to look at the screen for a long time, pull over to a safe place so as not to be distracted while driving. Immediately stop using the system in the event of a fault. Otherwise the system might be damaged. Contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible to have the system repaired. WARNING 220) Follow the safety rules here below: otherwise serious injuries may occur to the occupants or the system may be damaged. 221) If the volume is too loud this can be dangerous. Adjust the volume so that you can still hear background noises (e.g. horns, ambulances, police vehicles, etc.). IMPORTANT 70) Only clean the front panel and the display lens with a soft, clean, dry, anti-static cloth. Cleaning and polishing products may damage the surface. Never use alcohol, petrols and derivatives. 71) Do not use the display as a base for supports with suction pads or adhesives for external navigators or smartphones or similar devices. 253 MULTIMEDIA Uconnect™ RADIO CONTROLS ON FRONT PANEL 245 254 F0N0890 FRONT CONTROL PANEL SUMMARY TABLE Button Functions Mode Ignition Short button press Switching off Short button press Volume adjustment Turning the knob clockwise/anticlockwise Volume activation/deactivation (Mute/Pause) Short button press Exit the selection/return to previous screen Short button press Scrolling the list or tuning to a radio station or select previous/next track Turning the knob clockwise/anticlockwise Confirmation of the option displayed Short button press Confirmation of the option displayed Display mode selection (Radio, Media Player) PHONE Access to the Phone mode Short button press MENU Access to the Infotainment System/Settings menu Short button press MEDIA USB source selection Short button press RADIO Access to the Radio mode Short button press Store current radio station Long button press Stored radio station recall Short button press Selection of the group of radio presets or selection of the desired letter in each list Short button press BROWSE ENTER INFO 1-2-3-4-5-6 A-B-C 255 MULTIMEDIA 256 Button Functions Mode Search for previous radio station or selection of USB previous track Short button press Scan of lower frequencies until released/Fast rewind of USB track Long button press Search for next radio station or selection of USB next track Short button press Scan of higher frequencies until released/Fast forward of USB track Long button press Shuffle of USB tracks Short button press USB loop Short button press CONTROLS ON THE STEERING WHEEL (for versions/markets, where provided) The controls for the main system functions are present on the steering wheel to make control easier. The activation of the function selected is controlled, in some cases, by how long the button is pressed (short or long press) as described in the table below. 246 F1A0348 STEERING WHEEL CONTROL SUMMARY TABLE Button Interaction (pressure/rotation) Acceptance of incoming call Acceptance of the second incoming call and putting the active call on hold Rejection of incoming call Ending of call in progress Deactivation/reactivation of the microphone during a phone conversation Activation/deactivation of the USB source Pause Activation/deactivation of the radio source Mute function 257 MULTIMEDIA 258 Button Interaction (pressure/rotation) +/– Turning left wheel upwards or downwards: audio volume adjustment Short press: volume increase/decrease in single steps Long press: volume continuous increase/decrease until released Turning right wheel upwards or downwards: Short press (Radio mode): selection of next/previous station Long press (Radio mode): scan higher/lower frequencies until released Short press (USB mode): selection of previous/next track Long press (USB mode): fast forward/rewind until released OPERATION SWITCHING THE SYSTEM ON/OFF The system is switched on/off by pressing the button/knob . The electronic volume adjustment control rotates continuously (360°) in both directions, without stop positions. Turn the button/knob clockwise to increase the radio volume or anticlockwise to decrease it. RADIO (TUNER) MODE The system is equipped with the following tuners: AM, FM and DAB (for versions/markets, where provided). Radio mode selection Press the RADIO button on the front panel to activate radio mode. Selecting a frequency band The different tuning modes can be selected by pressing the RADIO button on the front panel. Displayed information After the desired radio station is selected on the display, the following information is shown (INFO mode activated): In the upper part: the preset station, the time and the other active radio settings are highlighted (e.g.: TA). In the central part: the name of the current station, the frequency and the radio text information (if any) are highlighted. FM station list Press the BROWSE ENTER button/knob to display the complete list of the FM stations that can be received. The A-B-C button can be used, depending on the chosen letter, to jump alphabetically to the first of the FM/DAB stations available for that letter. AM/FM radio station storage (where provided) The preset stations are available in all system modes and are selected by touching one of the presetting buttons 1-2-3-4-5-6 on the front panel. If you are tuned to a radio station that you wish to store, hold down the button on the display which corresponds to the desired preset until an acoustic confirmation signal is emitted. The system can store up to 18 radio stations in each mode. AM/FM radio station selection To search for the desired radio station or or use the press buttons wheel of the steering wheel controls knob. , or turn the "BROWSE/ENTER" Previous/next radio station search Press briefly the or button or use the wheel of the steering wheel controls : when the button is released the previous or next radio station is displayed. When searching forwards, if the system reaches the end of the band, it will automatically stop on the station where the search has started from. Previous/next radio station fast search or button to Hold down the start the fast search: when the button is released, the first tunable radio is played. DAB station list Press the BROWSE ENTER button/knob to display: the list of all DAB stations; the list of stations filtered by "Genres"; the list of stations filtered by "Ensembles" (broadcast group). Within each list, the "ABC" button allows the user to skip to the desired letter in the list. Radio station alphabetic selection The A-B-C button on the front panel can be used, depending on the chosen 259 MULTIMEDIA letter, to jump alphabetically to the first of the DAB stations available for that letter. MEDIA MODE Interaction modes for USB operation. Audio source selection Press the MEDIA button to select the USB audio source. Change track (next/previous) button or turn Briefly press the the BROWSE ENTER button/knob clockwise to play the next track, or briefly press the button or turn the BROWSE ENTER button/knob anticlockwise to return to the beginning of the selected track or to the beginning of the previous track if the current one has been played for less than 3 seconds. Fast forward/rewind through tracks Press and hold down the button to fast forward the selected track or keep the button pressed to fast rewind the track. The fast forward/rewind will stop once the / button is released or when the previous/next track is reached. Track selection (browse) Use this function to scroll through and select the tracks on the active device. 260 The choices available depend on the device connected. For example, on a USB device, you can also use the BROWSE ENTER button/knob to scroll through the list of artists, genres and albums available on the device, depending on the information available in the tracks. Within each alphabetical list, the A-BC button on the front panel allows the user to skip to the desired letter in the list. NOTE This button might be disabled for some Apple® devices. Press the BROWSE ENTER button to activate this function on the source being played. Turn the BROWSE ENTER button/knob to select the desired category and then press the button/knob to confirm the selection. button to cancel the Press the function. NOTE The indexing time of a USB device can vary according to the media inserted (in some cases it can take a few minutes). Track information display Press the INFO button to select the information displayed while playing (Artist, Album, Genre, Name, Folder, File name). Press the button to exit from the screen. Shuffle Press the button to play the tracks on USB in a random order. The corresponding icon is displayed. Press again to deactivate the function. Repeat Press the button to activate this function. The corresponding icon is displayed. Press again to deactivate the function. USB SOURCE To activate USB mode, connect the corresponding USB device to the vehicle USB port. 222) If a USB device is connected to the system on, this starts playing the tracks present on the device. NOTE The Uconnect™ system may not support some USB keys: in this case, it may not automatically switch from "Radio” mode to "Media” mode. If the device used does not play, verify its compatibility by selecting Media operation: a dedicated message will appear on the Uconnect™ system display. WARNING After using a USB recharging socket, we recommend disconnecting the device (smartphone), always removing the cable from the vehicle socket first, never from the device. Cables left flying or connected incorrectly could compromise correct recharging and/or the USB socket condition. NOTE The USB ports handle data transmission from the Pen Drive/Smartphone, etc. and slow recharging of an external device, which is not guaranteed as it depends on the device type/brand. PHONE MODE Phone mode activation Press the PHONE button on the front panel to activate the Phone mode. The available commands can be used to: dial the wished phone number; display and call the contacts in the mobile phone phonebook; display and call contacts from the registers of previous calls; pair up to 8 phones to make access and connection easier and quicker; transfer calls from the system to the mobile phone and vice versa and deactivate the microphone audio for private conversations. The mobile phone audio is transmitted through the audio system of the vehicle; the system automatically mutes the radio when the Phone function is used. Shown on display When a phone is connected to the system, the display shows various information (if available): status of roaming; network signal intensity; mobile phone battery charge; mobile phone name. Pairing a mobile phone To pair the mobile phone, proceed as follows: activate the Bluetooth® function on the mobile phone; press the PHONE button on the front panel; if no phone is paired with the system yet, the display shows a dedicated screen; select "Connect Phone" to start the pairing procedure then search for the Uconnect™ device on the mobile phone (if "No" is selected, the Phone main screen is displayed); when prompted by the mobile phone, use its keypad to enter the PIN code shown on the system display or confirm on the mobile phone the PIN displayed; from the "Settings" menu you can always pair a mobile phone by selecting "Phone menu/Add phone", then proceed as described above; during the pairing stage a screen is displayed showing the progress of the operation; NOTE The priority for the automatic reconnection is determined according to the order of connection. The last phone connected will have the highest priority. Making a phone call The operations described below can only be accessed if supported by the mobile phone in use. For all functions available, refer to the mobile phone owner's handbook. A call can be made by: selecting "Contacts" (Phonebook ......); selecting "Recent Calls list"; selecting "Keypad". Dialling the phone number using the "keypad" on the display Enter the phone number using the graphic keypad displayed. Proceed as follows: press the PHONE button on the front panel; select "Keypad" on the display and use the right "BROWSE/ENTER" knob to enter the number 261 MULTIMEDIA select the icon to make the call. Dialling the phone number using the mobile phone It is possible to dial a phone number with the mobile phone and continue using the system (never allow yourself to be distracted while driving). When a phone number is dialled with the keypad of the mobile phone, the audio of the call is played over your vehicle's sound system. WARNING 222) When connecting a USB device to the USB port, make sure that it does not obstruct the operation of the handbrake lever. 262 Uconnect™ 5" RADIO – Uconnect™ 5" RADIO NAV CONTROLS ON FRONT PANEL 247 F1A0478 263 MULTIMEDIA FRONT CONTROL PANEL SUMMARY TABLE Button Functions Mode Ignition Short button press Switching off Short button press Volume adjustment Left/right rotation of knob 2- Volume activation/deactivation (Mute/Pause) Short button press 3- Display on/off Short button press 4- Settings Short button press 5- Exit the selection/return to previous screen Short button press Scrolling the list or tuning to a radio station Left/right rotation of knob Confirmation of the option displayed Short button press 7- MORE Access to the additional functions (display of Time, Trip Computer, Outside temperature) Short button press 8- PHONE Phone data display Short button press TRIP 9- (Uconnect™ 5" Radio) Access to the Trip menu Short button press 1- 6- BROWSE ENTER 264 Button Functions Mode NAV 9- (Uconnect™ 5" Radio Nav) Access to the Navigation menu Short button press 10-MEDIA Support selection: USB, Bluetooth® Short button press 11-RADIO Access to the Radio mode Short button press 265 MULTIMEDIA CONTROLS ON THE STEERING WHEEL The controls for the main system functions are present on the steering wheel to make control easier. The activation of the function selected is controlled, in some cases, by how long the button is pressed (short or long press) as described in the table below. 248 STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS SUMMARY TABLE Button Interaction (pressure/rotation) Acceptance of incoming call Acceptance of the second incoming call and putting the active call on hold Activation of voice recognition for Phone function Interruption of the voice message in order to give a new voice command Interruption of voice recognition Rejection of incoming call Ending of call in progress deactivation/reactivation of the microphone during a phone conversation activation/deactivation of the USB, Bluetooth® source Pause activation/deactivation of radio Mute function 266 F0N0891 Button Interaction (pressure/rotation) +/– Turning the left wheel upwards or downwards: adjust audio volume; hands-free; SMS message reader; voice announcements and music sources Short press: volume increase/decrease in single steps Long press: volume continuous increase/decrease until released Activation of voice recognition Interruption of the voice message in order to give a new voice command Interruption of voice recognition Turning right wheel upwards or downwards: Short press (Radio mode): selection of next/previous station Long press (Radio mode): scan higher/lower frequencies until released Short press (USB, Bluetooth®): selection of previous/next track Long press (USB, Bluetooth®): fast forward/rewind until released 267 MULTIMEDIA OPERATION SWITCHING THE SYSTEM ON/OFF The system is switched on/off by pressing the button/knob. Turn the button/knob clockwise to increase the radio volume or anticlockwise to decrease it. Radio (Tuner) mode After the desired radio station is selected, the following information is shown on the display: At the top: the list of radio stations stored (preset) is displayed; the station currently playing is highlighted. In the middle: display of the name of the current radio station and the buttons for selecting the previous or next radio station. At the bottom: display of the following buttons: "Browse": list of the radio stations available; "AM/FM", "AM/DAB", "FM/DAB": selection of the desired frequency band (button reconfigurable according to the band selected: AM, FM or DAB); “Tune": manual radio station tuning (not available for DAB radio); "Info": additional information on the source being listened to; “Audio”: access to the “Audio Settings” screen. 268 Audio menu To access the “Audio" menu, press the button on the front panel, scroll through the menu, then select and press the “Audio" option on the display. The following adjustments can be carried out using the "Audio" menu: "Equalizer" (for versions/markets, where provided); "Balance/Fade" (left/right and front/rear audio balance adjustment); "Volume/Speed" (excluding versions with Hi-Fi system) speed-dependent automatic volume adjustment; "Loudness" (for versions/markets, where provided); "Auto-On Radio"; "Radio Off Delay". To exit the "Audio" menu, press the /Done button. on the device, depending on the information available in the tracks. MEDIA MODE Press the "Source" button to select the desired audio source among those available: USB or Bluetooth®. Bluetooth® SOURCE This mode is activated by pairing a Bluetooth® device containing music tracks with the system. Track selection (browse) Use this function to scroll through and select the tracks on the active device. The choices available depend on the device connected. For example, on a USB or Bluetooth® device, you can scroll through the list of artists, genres and albums available PAIRING A Bluetooth® AUDIO DEVICE To pair a Bluetooth® audio device, proceed as follows: activate the Bluetooth® function on the device; press the MEDIA button on the front panel; WARNING A few Bluetooth® devices do not offer the possibility of scrolling tracks through all categories. Within each list, the "ABC" button allows the user to skip to the desired letter in the list. NOTE This button might be disabled for some Apple® devices. Press the "Browse" button to activate this function on the source being played. Turn the BROWSE ENTER button/knob to select the desired category and then press the button/knob to confirm the selection. Press the "X" button to cancel the function. if the "Media" source is active, press the "Source" button; select the Bluetooth® Media source; press the "Add Device" button; search for Uconnect™ on the Bluetooth® audio device (during the pairing stage a screen is displayed showing the progress of the operation); when requested by the audio device, enter the PIN code shown on the system display or confirm on the device the PIN displayed; if the pairing procedure is completed successfully, a screen is displayed. Answer “Yes" to the question to pair the Bluetooth® audio device as favourite (the device will have priority over all other devices to be paired subsequently). If “No” is selected, the priority is determined according to the order of connection. The last device connected will have the highest priority; an audio device can also be paired by pressing the button on the front panel and selecting "Phone/Bluetooth®". WARNING If the Bluetooth® connection between mobile phone and system is lost, consult the mobile phone handbook. USB SOURCE To enable USB mode, insert an appropriate USB device into the USB port on the vehicle. 222) If a USB device is inserted with the system on, it will start playing the tracks found on the device. NOTE The Uconnect™ system may not support some USB keys: in this case, it may not automatically switch from "Radio” mode to "Media” mode. If the device used does not play, verify its compatibility by selecting Media operation: a dedicated message will appear on the Uconnect™ system display. WARNING After using a USB recharging socket, we recommend disconnecting the device (smartphone), always removing the cable from the vehicle socket first, never from the device. Cables left flying or connected incorrectly could compromise correct recharging and/or the USB socket condition. NOTE The USB ports handle data transmission from the Pen Drive/Smartphone, etc. and slow recharging of an external device, which is not guaranteed as it depends on the device type/brand. PHONE MODE PHONE MODE ACTIVATION Press the PHONE button on the front panel to activate the Phone mode. Use the buttons on the display to: dial the phone number (using the graphic keypad on the display); display and call the contacts in the mobile phone phonebook; display and call contacts from the registers of previous calls; pair up to 10 phones/audio device to make access and connection easier and quicker; transfer calls from the system to the mobile phone and vice versa and deactivate the microphone audio for private conversations. The mobile phone audio is transmitted through the audio system of the vehicle; the system automatically mutes the radio when the Phone function is used. PAIRING A MOBILE PHONE WARNING Carry out this operation only with vehicle stationary and in safety conditions; this function is deactivated when the vehicle is moving. The pairing procedure for a mobile phone is described below: always 269 MULTIMEDIA 270 consult the handbook for the mobile phone in any case. To pair the mobile phone, proceed as follows: activate the Bluetooth® function on the mobile phone; press the PHONE button on the front panel; if no phone is paired with the system yet, the display shows a dedicated screen; select “Yes" to start the pairing procedure, then search for the Uconnect™ device on the mobile phone (if "No" is selected, the Phone main screen is displayed); when prompted by the mobile phone, use its keypad to enter the PIN code shown on the system display or confirm on the mobile phone the PIN displayed; from the "Phone" screen you can always pair a mobile phone by pressing the "Settings" button: press the "Add Device" button and proceed as described above; during the pairing stage a screen is displayed showing the progress of the operation; when the pairing procedure is completed successfully, a screen is displayed: answer "Yes" to the question to pair the mobile phone as favourite (the mobile phone will have priority over all other mobile phones to be paired subsequently). If no other devices are paired, the system will consider the first associated device as favourite. NOTE The priority is determined according to the order of connection for mobile phones which are not set as favourites. The last phone connected will have the highest priority. NOTE On some mobile phones, to make the SMS voice reading function available, the SMS notification option on the phone must be enabled; this option is usually available on the phone, in the Bluetooth® connections menu for a device registered as Uconnect™. Making a phone call The operations described below can only be accessed if supported by the mobile phone in use. For all functions available, refer to the mobile phone owner's handbook. A call can be made by: selecting the icon (mobile phone phonebook); selecting "Recent Calls"; selecting the icon; pressing the "Redial" button. Text message reader The system can read the messages received by the mobile phone. To use this function the mobile phone must support the SMS exchange function through Bluetooth®. If this function is not supported by the phone, the corresponding graphic button is deactivated (greyed out). When a text message is received, the display will show a screen where the options "Listen", "Call" or "Ignore" can be selected. button to access the Press the list of SMS messages received by the mobile phone (the list displays a maximum of 60 messages received). SETTINGS Press the button on the front panel to display the "Settings" main menu. NOTE The menu items displayed vary according to the versions. The menu includes the following items: Display; Clock & Date; Safety/Assistance (for versions/markets, where provided); Lights (for versions/markets where provided); Doors & Locks; Audio; Phone/Bluetooth; Radio; Restore Default Settings. Safety/Assistance (for versions/markets, where provided) Rain sensor The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted with this function (for versions/markets, where provided). Lights (for versions/markets, where provided) This function can be used to carry out the following adjustments: Headlamp sensor adjustment of the headlight activation sensitivity; "Automatic High Beam/High Beam Control" (for versions/markets where provided): activation/deactivation of automatic main beam headlights. "Daytime Running Lights" (DRL) (for versions/markets, where provided): activation/deactivation of daytime running lights; "Cornering lights" (for versions/markets, where provided): activation/deactivation of the cornering lights; Doors and Door locks. This function activates/deactivates automatic door locking when the vehicle is in motion ("Autoclose" function). "MORE" MODE Press the MORE button on the front panel to display the operating settings: Outside temperature Clock Compass (only for Uconnect™ 5" Radio Nav) Trip Computer (only for Uconnect™ 5" Radio Nav) Settings (only for Uconnect™ 5" Radio Nav) NAVIGATION 224) (Only for Uconnect™ 5" Radio Nav) Planning a route WARNING In the interest of safety and to reduce distractions while you are driving, you should always plan a route before you start driving. Using the destination search function, it is possible to find and reach your destinations in different ways: searching for a specific address, a partial address, a specific type of location (for example a service station or a restaurant), a postal code, a POI (Point Of Interest) near your current position (for example, a restaurant with the search type set to "nearby"), a pair of latitude and longitude coordinates, or by selecting a point on the map. Select “Search” in the Main menu and set the search for a destination. While entering the information, the list displays the corresponding addresses and POIs in two separate lists. The corresponding address and city are displayed in the Address list and the POI, the type of POIs and the locations are displayed in the Point of Interest lists. To plan a route towards the destination, select the “Guide” button. A route is planned and you are guided to your destination, using spoken instructions and on-screen directions. VOICE NOTE For languages not supported by the system, voice controls are not available. To use the voice commands, press button ("Voice" button) or the ("Phone" button) on the steering wheel and give the command you want to activate, out loud. Global The following voice commands can be given after pressing the button on the steering wheel : Help Cancel Repeat Voice Prompts 271 MULTIMEDIA Phone The following voice commands can be given after pressing the button on the : steering wheel Call Dial Redial Call back Recent calls Outgoing calls Missed calls Incoming calls PhoneBook Search Show SMS Send an SMS Show messages Radio The following voice commands can be given after pressing the button on the steering wheel : Tune to FM "frequency" Tune to AM "frequency" Tune to "radio name" FM Tune to "radio name" Media The following voice commands can be given after pressing the button on the steering wheel : Play song... Play album… 272 Play artist… Play genre… Play playlist… Play podcast… Play audiobook… Play the track number... Select the source... View... Navigation (only for Uconnect™ 5" Nav) The following voice commands can be given after pressing the button on the steering wheel : Drive Home 2D vision 3D vision Clear route Add Favourite Repeat instruction WARNING 223) When connecting a USB device to the USB port, make sure that it does not obstruct the operation of the handbrake lever. 224) In the interest of safety and to reduce distractions while you are driving, you should always plan a route before you start driving. OFFICIAL TYPE APPROVALS Radio devices All radio equipment supplied with the vehicle complies with the 2014/53/EU directive. For further information visit the www.mopar.eu/owner or http://aftersales.fiat.com/elum/ websites. Radio frequency devices All radio frequency devices comply with the regulations in force in the countries in which they are sold. For further information go to www.mopar.eu/owner or http://aftersales.fiat.com/elum. IMPORTANT LUGGAGE CARRIER Follow the instructions contained in the assembly kit carefully. Assembly must be performed by qualified personnel. After travelling for a few kilometres, check to ensure that the fixing screws for the attachments are well tightened. Distribute the load evenly and pay attention to side winds when driving. Fully comply with the regulations in force concerning maximum clearance. Never exceed the maximum permitted loads (see chapter "Technical specifications"). ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER Take care when fitting additional spoilers, alloy wheels or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp, repeated braking or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructs the pedal stroke (mats, etc.). PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT The Diesel particulate filter (DPF) reaches high temperatures during normal operation. Do not park the vehicle on flammable material (grass, dry leaves, pine needles etc.): fire hazard. RIM PROTECTOR TYRES DO NOT fit wheel hub caps when using integral hub caps fixed (with springs) to the steel rim and after sale tyres provided with a Rim Protector. Use of unsuitable tyres and wheel caps may cause sudden decrease of tyre pressure. INTERIOR FITTINGS Never place potentially dangerous items in the open compartment on the dashboard; in the event of a collision may be flung into the passenger compartment and injure the occupants. 273 Oil change? The experts recommend PETRONAS Selenia The engine of your car is factory filled with PETRONAS Selenia. This is an engine oil range which satisfies the most advanced international specifications. Its superior technical characteristics allow PETRONAS Selenia to guarantee the highest performance and protection of your engine. The PETRONAS Selenia range includes a number of technologically advanced products: PETRONAS Selenia K Power Fully synthetic lubricant developed for American design petrol engines. PETRONAS Selenia Multipower Gas Fully synthetic lubricant for petrol engines supplied with methane or LPG. Protection against valve wear. PETRONAS Selenia WR Forward Fully synthetic Low SAPS lubricant for Euro 6 diesel engines. High fuel economy. PETRONAS Selenia Multipower C3 Synthetic lubricant for petrol and diesel engines. Fuel economy characteristics. PETRONAS Selenia Digitek Pure Energy Fully synthetic lubricant for petrol engines. High fuel economy characteristics. The range also includes Selenia K, Selenia 20K, Selenia Turbo Diesel, Selenia Sport, Selenia Sport Power, Selenia Racing, Selenia WR, Selenia WR Pure Energy. For further information on PETRONAS Selenia products visit the web site www.pli-petronas.com MAINTAIN YOUR VEHICLE IN TIP TOP CONDITIONS WITH Mopar Vehicle Protection offers a series of service contracts that are designed to give all our customers the pleasure of driving their vehicle without any hitch's and concerns. Our product portfolio consists of a wide and flexible range of extended warranty and maintenance plans endorsed by FCA. Each with a series of different coverage tiers, in terms of durability and mileage, built to accommodate you’re driving needs. Service contracts are made by experts that know every part of your vehicle, and commit themselves to maintain it in tip top conditions. Our knowledge and passion is tailored around designing products that promises all our drivers “worry-free driving”. Only with Mopar Vehicle Protection you are ensured that all service operations are performed by highly qualified and specialized technicians in authorized FCA repair facilities, using the right tools, equipment and only original parts, all over Europe. Check which Service Contract plans are available on your market today and choose the Service Contract that suits your driving habits best. Ask your local dealer for further information. NOTES CONTENTS 4-Seater bench seat (Crew Cab Van versions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 A BS ................... ABS (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional heater . . . . . . . . . . . Additional rear climate control (Panorama/Combi) . . . . . . . . Additional rear heating (Panorama/Combi) . . . . . . . . Additive for diesel emissions AdBlue (UREA) . . . . . . . . . . Advice for extending battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASR (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASR system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic headlight sensor . . . . Automatic main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic transmission . . . . . . . Automatic transmission gear lever release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 79 . . 38 . . 38 . . 38 . 141 . . . . . . . . . . Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery (disconnector) . . . . . . . . . Battery (recharging) . . . . . . . . . . Battery disconnector . . . . . . . . . Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . Bodywork Advice for preserving the bodywork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protection from atmospheric agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bodywork paint identification plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bodywork version . . . . . . . . . . . Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSA (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSA system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Compatibility of vehicle seats with Isofix child seats . . . . . . . . . . 30 Conditions of use . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Cylinder marking . . . . . . . . . . . 209 213 215 . 42 199 . 84 . 84 183 205 204 . 46 . 80 Cargo Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 . 80 Carrying children safely Arrangement possibilities for child . 37 restraint systems . . . . . . . . . . . 97 . 25 Child restraint systems . . . . . . . 97 Safety regulations . . . . . . . . . . 97 . 25 Ceiling lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 122 Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Chassis marking . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 186 Checking levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 CO2 emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 205 Compartment beneath passenger . 30 side front seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 . . . . . 101 137 . 30 126 213 D aytime running lights . . . . . . . . . 25 Dead Lock device . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Demanding vehicle use . . . . . . . . 191 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . 25 Direction indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Display Standard screen . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Door locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Double rear swing door . . . . . . . . . 11 Drive Mode function . . . . . . . . . . 125 Driving assistance systems . . . . . . 84 Driving style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 E lectric windows . Electronic alarm . . Emergency starting Engine . . . . . . . . Engine codes . . . Engine coolant . . Engine Idle Preset Engine marking . . ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 . 10 183 217 215 199 128 213 CONTENTS Engine oil . . . . . . . . Engine oil level gauge ESC (system) . . . . . Exterior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fiat Code system ........... Flap on bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flashing the headlights . . . . . . . . Flex Floor rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . Fluids and lubricants . . . . . . . . . . Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Follow Me Home device . . . . . . . Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front airbag driver's side . . . . . Manually deactivating the front airbag and side bag . . . . . . . . Passenger's front airbag . . . . . Front light clusters . . . . . . . . . . . Front roof light (changing a bulb) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel cut-off switch . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full Brake Control system . . . . . . Fuses (replacement) . . . . . . . . . . Gateway FMS module Gear Shift Indicator ........ .......... Hazard warning lights ........ 199 HBA (Hydraulic Brake Assist) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 . 53 HBA (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 . 80 Head restraints . 25 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 .. 8 Headlight alignment corrector . . . . 29 . 16 Headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 . 25 Headlights . 16 Headlight alignment 245 corrector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 . 30 Light beam alignment . . . . . . . . 29 . 25 Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . 30 110 Heating and ventilation . . . . . . . . . 35 110 Heating and ventilation controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 110 Hill Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 110 Hill Descent Control System . . . . . 80 155 Hill Holder (system) . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Hill Holder system . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 160 249 I dentification data . . . . . . . . . . . 213 185 Ignition device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 137 Independent additional heater . . . . 38 133 Inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 161 Inflation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 172 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 . 53 Interior fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 . 30 Isofix child restraint systems (setup) Arrangement possibilities for child restraint system on seats of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 J ump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K ey release automatic 183 transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 L ane Departure Warning (Driving Advisor) (system) . . . . . . . . . . Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . Light beam alignment . . . . . . . . . Light bulbs types of bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . Lights off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 207 . 29 M ain beam headlights . 25 ........ Maintenance and care - Regular checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance and care - Scheduled Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maintenance and care - Service Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual climate control system . . . Manually deactivating the front airbag and side bag . . . . . . . . Moving footboard . . . . . . . . . . . MSR (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSR system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 . 25 143 191 191 193 . 36 110 . 11 . 79 . 79 Multifunction display Refuelling the vehicle . . . . . . . . . Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Replacing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Replacing an exterior bulb . . . . . . Dipped beam headlights . . . . . Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Direction indicators . . . . . . . . Number plate lights . . . . . . . . . . 155 Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Occupant protection systems . . . . 94 Main beam headlights . . . . . . . On-board instruments . . . . . . . . . . 49 Side/tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . Open storage compartment . . . . . . 44 Replacing interior bulbs . . . . . . . . Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Replacing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Revolving seat with seat belts . . . Pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Rims and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Rubber hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 152 155 155 155 155 155 155 160 Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snow tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed block . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . Sprung seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start&Stop system . . . . . . . . . Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Supplementary restraint system . 16 (SRS) - AIRBAG . . . . . . . . . 220 System inspection . . . . . . . . . 211 T ablet holder . . . . . . . . . . . . Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . 199 Saving fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Pre-tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 SBR system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Prolonged vehicle inactivity . . . . . 150 Seat base plastic covers . . . . . . . . 16 Seat belts Quick repair kit Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 Fix&Go Automatic tyres . . . . . . 181 Seat with revolving base . . . . . . . . 16 R adio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Seats (Combi versions) . . . . . . . . . 16 Rear ceiling light (changing a bulb) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Seats (Panorama version) . . . . . . . 16 Rear fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Seats with adjustable armrests . . . . 16 Rear footboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Setup for Isofix child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Rear view camera . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Side bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Rear-view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 155 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 208 220 129 126 . 16 125 118 219 . 23 . . 110 . . 213 . . . 44 Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Third brake lights . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Tips, controls and general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Towing trailers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Traction Plus system . . . . . . . . . . 83 Traffic Sign Recognition (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Tray under the seat . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 CONTENTS Uconnect 5" Radio – Uconnect 5" Radio Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Uconnect Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Version with methane system (Natural Power) . . . . . . . . . . . 142 VIN plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Warning lights and messages . . . . . . . . . 56 . . 238 . . 220 . . 220 . . 207 . . . 33 33, 206 Weights and loads . . . . . . . . Wheel geometry . . . . . . . . . Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . Window washing . . . . . . . . . Windscreen wiper . . . . . . . . Windscreen/rear window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 FCA Italy S.p.A. - MOPAR - Technical Service Operations - Service Engineering Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 3 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italy) Print no. 603.85.089 - 12/2019 - 1st Edition WHY CHOOSING GENUINE PARTS We really know your vehicle because we invented, designed and built it: we really know every single detail. At Fiat Professional Service authorised workshops you can find technicians directly trained by us, offering quality and professionalism for all service operations. Fiat Professional workshops are always close to you for the regular servicing operations, season checks and practical recommendations by our experts. With Fiat Professional Genuine Parts you keep the reliability, comfort and performance features of your new vehicle unchanged in time: that's why you bought it for. Always ask for Genuine Parts for the components used on our vehicles; we recommend them because they come from our steady commitment in research and development of highly innovative technologies. For all these reasons: rely on Genuine Parts, because they are the only ones designed by Fiat Professional for your vehicle. SAFETY: BRAKING SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT: PARTICULATE FILTERS, CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE COMFORT: SUSPENSION AND WINDSCREEN WIPERS PERFORMANCE: SPARK PLUGS, INJECTORS AND BATTERIES LINEACCESSORI: ROOF RACK BARS, WHEEL RIMS ENGLISH The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FCA Italy S.p.A. reserves the right to modify the models and versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons. If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer. Printed in recycled paper without chlorine.